Home

identiFINDER®R300, User Manual

1. 53 43 Visible menu hierarchy on a web page with narrow layout 53 44 Single submenu on a web page with wide layout 54 45 Anatomy ofa web page with a data table 55 46 Anatomy of a web page with details of a record rn 57 47 Web page section with GPS cOOTdiNateS 4 58 48 Steps ofthe transmission of data to a reachback server 58 49 Successful transmission of data to a reachback server 59 50 Example printout of measurement results aoao noaa a a a ee eee 60 51 Entering the password before accessing protected web pages 61 52 Entering the administration password een 61 53 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Product identification 62 54 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Starting up rns 63 55 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Initialization 63 56 FLIRidentiFINDER R300 after powering up ee 63 57 Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDERR300 ele 64 58 Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 during an alarm 65 59 Battery almost empty n9 RERLRREG Sex 99 ee d X ES5445445445 a 65 60 Schematic timing of triple beeps indicating low power conditions 65 61 Low Power Dose Rate Mode 1252 22 29 rro rr 4555 66 C SOU IS x33 3 2 03 4
2. 2 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys 2 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is equipped with three keys Figure 5 p 26 and Figure 7 p 28 The single key at the bottom is the power key O Itis used to switch the instrument on and off to cancel edit operations or return to superior menus The other two buttons on the 0 left and 3 right side of the instrument are the main oper ating keys They change their function according to the current mode of operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 For your convenience the actual function of these keys in any given situation is displayed in the bottom part of the screen Figure 7 p 28 A detailed description of the keys functions under various circumstances is given in chapter 6 p 103 Holding the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with your hand Figure 10 p 33 you can for example press one key with your thumb and the other one with your middle finger To accomodate to your handedness or your personal preferences Figure 10 p 33 and Figure 11 p 34 you can swap the function of these keys 6 9 p 122 This document refers to the keys and their functions using the normal assigment and label them as Q and Q respectively 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 E Dose Rate E O n O 20 uSv h 0 000 cps Neutror SFLIR e nanoRaider a Figure 10 Right handed operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 w
3. D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 33 Dose Alarm Thresholds gt Options Menu p 103 gt Alarm Options p 105 gt Dose Alarm Thresholds m settings p 180 gt Alarm p 188 gt Gamma Alarms p 189 This screen Figure 175 p 161 groups the thresholds for dose alarms and warnings Specify the thresholds by setting a value with a unit The base unit Sv or rem available here reflects your preferences see 6 31 p 159 You can specify values between 1 nSv and 1 Sv 100 nrem to 100 rem 4r For meaningful alerts specify an alarm threshold above the warning threshold WU Settings 22 Mar 16 46 Dose Thresholds Alarm 100 0 mSv Warning 150 0 pSv on Figure 175 Dose alarm threshold settings identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tH 6 34 Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds Settings and Commands Alarm The value with unit for the alarm threshold Use Off the lowest value to suppress this alarm Available units are nSv uSv mSv Sv nrem urem mrem rem The value with unit for the warning threshold Use Off the lowest value to suppress this warning Available units are nSv gu Sv mSv Sv nrem urem mrem rem D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oec gt D cD Edit values see 2 2 3
4. 3333 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 o 303 3 9 x ddr dd 176 195 Beginning ofthe installation ou woe mo3 o3 303 3 3 3 3 3 2 309 9 9 9 9 9 994b Az 177 196 End ofthe installation 6445 4b E ER HEE deo m meom eme xo mcm m dede de de 177 197 Windows 7 reporting and configuring new hardware 177 198 EMG oL rhe staan 2nn ee eee ime a OEE EO 39 EHS EE 9 bo ded XR 178 199 Valid addresses of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 after a connection to a computer was Poneto EER Eekerse reer ee 5559 33 93 9 2 3 P3 2 d d dde dea uer dr iru 178 200 Diy We LL RR 5x eee eet 3 3 333 3 3 2 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 3 5 d ded 182 201 Resources WER pag 499 9 9 998 9 FOR Ew oh hp ai oh aaa A 183 202 General Settings web page 124444444444 m n m non ok n dm kom komo a 185 203 The GPS and Clock settings We pate uu uuu tated RE EE REE EOE Rm a a ox 187 204 Alarm Settings webpage x03 cbo39 Gode ko wo 9 9 9 3x33 A 189 205 Connectivity Settings WED page 2 222456 wee eee we ow a n 191 206 Bluetooth Settings web page as anmas rro oo AAA 5 4 193 207 Nuclide Settings Web page 2222243855 ee ee eee wR tni pipas p EEE ES 194 208 Backup web page unir rs rra 195 209 Bulk download web page naaa 9 AAA AA 198 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection 210 ALi 212 als 214 215 216 217 ZAG 219 220 221 2202 223 224 225 226 zed 228 229 230 231 232 2323 234 233 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244
5. Pi A ah eee EM nfiTuyinm Arracenriac ntifying Accessories Figure 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 with accessories in Pelican carrying case 1 Welcome Model nanoRaider Variant ZH Serial 103156000000 Only for variante with DOT SP12131 a certain neutron detector CE X FE Made in USA Figure 3 Name plate at the rear side of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 1 6 Instrument Description and Application Overview 1 6 Instrument Description and Application Overview The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can be described as a small but powerful computer with keyboard and LCD screen further equipped with dedicated detectors for gamma and neutron radiation plus some auxiliary sensors such as a receiver for the NAVSTAR global positioning system GPS All data acquired by the sensors are recorded processed and evaluated by a sophisticated software that discriminates innocent from threatening radiation even when operated by personnel with minimal training A general outline of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s functional elements is given in Figure 4 p 25 while Figure 5 p 26 helps to identify and locate the various components of the instrument e A microcomputer shown in the center of Figure 4 p 25 is the central element of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 It is connected to various peripherals for input output and communi cation e Green circles in the upper left part of Figure 4 p 25 represent input pe
6. 176 Dose rate alarm threshold settings so es eee ee BRR x x x x x x x xx 163 177 Neu tron dlarm threshold settings coo 9 9 949 T9 4P T543 x54 164 178 Current Alarm State whoa ee dae aaa ia opc ai os oi olco fac 165 179 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Mini USB B connector and a computer USB Wenn c IEEE TAN 168 180 USB socket covered byaflapintherubberboot ln 168 181 Plugging and unplugging the cable lo RR CR ORO RUE OX ERR REESE x ox x 169 182 Denotbend he cable ar the DIUP a uid Seg R480 452088 eR EEEE NANNA 169 183 FLIR identiFINDER R300 mounted as mass storage device on a computer running Mi wairco WINS in eee eee eee ias 170 182 FLIR RNDIS driver installer lt s s sasa aam mm ee eR TR RR TR RAO OR URS RR s 171 185 Beginning ofthe installation 24242224 63xzm xJ9 6Le34 x GS 172 186 INSAMa do Warning gt uuu 93 9493993 3 m 935 2 5325353 172 187 Endofthe installation 6434444444565 rr EPR 173 188 Windows XP reporting new hardware at the notification area 173 189 Windows XP New Hardware Wizard a e eo 173 190 Specifying a driver source a oa 0 RR OR RR A 174 191 Installation warning 2244544454555 REDPRDDPE e sd ves eee 3 3 9 174 192 End ofthe installation uu ccc aac cae eee 433 33 9 9 X X 6k 36x 8 xk ee 9x x32 175 193 FLIR RNDIS driver installer amp 9 eoe OR OR EROR OR OR RORORE RERO RO RR OR OR x34 9 x xs 176 194 Installation warning zd o 9
7. AAN 4 La entrFIND a n32UU CII Z U 14 Li VOUZJ I IJCU IJ 8 12 Spectra Web Page Spectrum 4711 ANSI N42 42 2006 n42 An XML file according to ANSI N42 42 2006 p 269 containing instrument information and the measured spectrum Spectrum 4711 ANSI N42 42 2012 n42 An XML file according to ANSI N42 42 2012 p 269 containing instrument information and the measured spectrum Spectrum 4711 Measurement spc A text file containing instrument information and the measured spectrum Spectrum 4711 Measurement spe A text file containing instrument information and the measured spectrum identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Settings i Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Spectrum NO 68 ON Spectrum Information Spectrum Counts 62 Energy Range 234 237 keV Gross counts 4853 Dose Rate Data tn CIO CO CO MS Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Neutron Data Minimum 0 counts Maximum 0 counts Baraton O BS Download A 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 213 Details of a spectrum record identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feh2015 8 13 Alarms Web Page 8 13 Alarms Web Page El Data p 180 Alarms This web page Figure 214 p 206 tabulates the alarms and warnings stored in the FLIR identiFI
8. _ Download Download a schema from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer 8 3 General Web Page Ls Settings p 180 General This web page Figure 202 p 185 provides access to various settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 for inspection or editing To transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 click Save 8 3 1 Measurement OS Settings p 180 General p 184 Measurement This web page section Figure 202 p 185 lets you inspect or edit settings related to the measure ment of gamma radiation You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under gt Options Menu p 103 gt Dose Rate Settings p 159 gt Options Menu p 103 Finder Settings p 157 gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Data Logging p 104 gt Automated Mode Settings p 135 8 3 2 Identification LOS Settings p 180 General p 184 Identification This web page section Figure 202 p 185 lets you inspect or edit settings regarding measurement and presentation of identification results You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Identification Options p 103 gt Identification Set
9. DUN Access Number for the satellite phone from the service provider identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feh2015 10 2 Configuring Remote Server Settings for the Satellite Phone FLIR Detection HTTP URI URI web address of a reachback server The protocol http is part of the URI that is you can change it to https for secure transfer if required A https connections require a trusted SSL certificate on the server A Protocols other than http or https are not supported rr identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 11 Powering the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Chapter 11 Powering the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 comes with a rechargeable battery as internal power source which can be replaced only by our service B 4 p 257 11 1 External Power Sources You can connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to external power sources via the Mini USB B con nector Figure 5 p 26 for example to a e wall mounted power supply use the Mini USB B to USB A cable included with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 1 p 21 e USB port of a computer use the Mini USB B to USB A cable included with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 1 p 21 e car adapter use the Mini USB B to USB A cable included with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 1 p 21 A Please refer to section 7 1 p 168 for information about plugging and unplugging cables The FLIR identiFINDER R300 draws a current of approxi
10. Figure 144 Automated Mode Settings A Automated identification on dose rate warning This feature can be helpful when used in controlled circumstances such as monitoring pedestrian flow through a controlled choke point where the operator can manage the flow and hold the line until the identification measurement is complete This allows for hands free operation and a simplified path to the required result Use of this feature in uncontrolled situations however can generate very confusing and disorienting information Consider for example trying to use this feature while in the middle of a crowd with people moving in multiple directions The instrument may register a passing warning and initiate an identification measurement on a target that continues to move away This target could continue to move away in any direction so as to place the operator in a dilemma what to do It is highly likely that the instrument will fail to complete the identification process so concluding with an inconclusive and useless result It is highly recommended that this mode ONLY be used when the situation is controlled and manageable The success of the instrument or operator unit can be adversely affected if this advice is not followed though there is no fault of either the instrument or the operator FLIR Detection Inc also wishes to avoid the performance ofthe instrument being called into question through no fault of the instrument
11. Clock Time Zone GMT 08 00 Prices 2011 A 59 17 Selected Entry Field Selected Component Time 15 18 Pacific Time US amp Canada Reveal More Commands Next Component Figure 24 Changing Combined Values Selecting components Press or to select the component you want to edit To get the commands for editing back press until O or C reappear After you finished editing all components press until you see the command then press Q In case you change your mind you can editing the value with Q Reveal the command with 9399 if necessary The value in effect before you started editing with GS3 2999 will be reestab lished Pressing O for a moment also cancels editing A Do not press O for too long That would power down your FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 2 5 Changing Numerical Values A lot of settings are numerical values often with a immutable unit Several commands Figure 12 p 35 are available for editing numerical values One ofthe number s digits is always selected Figure 25 p 42 that is editing commands are applied to this digit If you start changing a number with see 2 2 3 p 37 the rightmost least significant digit is selected identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 at 2 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys 2 Identification rey As 8 Selected Entry Field Selected Digit Extra Duration 30s Confidence Show Usage Hide O mE Figure 25 Changing Numerical Values
12. Settings and Commands User Name The user name and Password the password as provided by your cell phone carrier 4 This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 Connection String The connection info as provided by your cell phone carrier 4 This item is available for FLIR identiF NDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 Phone Number The phone number to access a data connection as provided by your cell phone carrier or cell phone vendor 4 This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 HTTP URI The address of the server receiving data from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 via Bluetooth or the web interface ED D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Edit composite and text values see 2 2 4 p 40 and 2 2 6 p 43 for details Return to the superior menu 6 25 Mass Storage gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Mass Storage This command Figure 165 p 151 lets the FLIR identiFINDER R300 behave like a write protected USB mass storage device similar to a hard disk or a USB stick You can connect itto a local computer 7 2 p 170 to copy files from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to the computer BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623
13. 3 The current IP address is shown on screen whenever the FLIR identiFINDER R300 de tects a connection to a network Figure 199 p 178 D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 27 Report Settings gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Report Settings EL Settings p 180 Connectivity p 190 Reports p 192 This screen Figure 168 p 154 groups settings specifying the content of reports you can download via the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s web interface 8 p 179 or send to remote servers 9 p 219 Settings and Commands Operator Name Your name and your phone number for inclusion in reports identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tg 6 28 Download Settings 2 Reports Operator Name Jane Doe Voice Phone 1 800 555 0142 Figure 168 Report settings Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details 000 Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Edit composite and text values see 2 2 4 p 40 and 2 2 6 p 43 for details Return to the superior menu 6 28 Download Settings 22 Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Download Settings E settings p 180 gt Connect
14. A If GPS date and time information become available while you edit the date or time editing will be cancelled and the GPS clock is used Settings and Commands Select your time zone from the list built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Time zones are specified as offset from UTC GMT Figures 132 133 p 126 126 Periods for daylight savings time however might be different for the same offset from UTC in various regions To have the FLIR identiFINDER R300 consider the correct daylight savings time for your time zone make sure to check the region info when selecting the offset 11 Settings 21 Mar 16 06 E Le GPS Status Time Zone Offset Ps Clock is Used to Set Date and Time Mountain Time US amp Canada a one s GPS Status Time Zone Offset Set Date and Time Pe Clock is Used to Arizona Time Zone Region Figure 133 Clock Settings Selecting the time zone EE identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 mE 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference Specify year month and day of the current date Specify hours and minutes of the current time aS The time is specified in 24 hour format ISO 8601 CD D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details 00D Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details O aD Edit composite values see 2 2 4 p 40 for details Return to the superior menu 6 11 GPS Settings gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options
15. M Spectrum 29 Mar 16 02 79 counts 504 keV 3072 keV E a Cursor Decoration Marker Decoration RT 1 1 8s Gc 1660 4 0 060 uSv h DI 0 696 Nc 258 Mark Channel Figure 114 ROI Specification Marking the first ROI boundary Clear Markers Clear all markers VAR GEARS CTRD Zoom ROI Choose a horizontal display scale and range Zoom 3 MeV All the channels 3 MeV range of the spectrum scaled to fit into the available screen width Figure 116 p 111 If you move the cursor off screen it will re appear on the other side Zoom 1 5 MeV The first half of the channels 1 5 MeV range of the spectrum scaled to fit into the available screen width Figure 117 p 112 If you move the cursor off screen it will re appear on the other side w identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference M Spectrum E 41 counts 711 keV 3072 keV b s d A eran Decoration Marker Decoration Marker Decoration RT 1 1 8s Gc 1660 4 0 060 uSv h DI 0 696 Nc 258 Mark Channel Figure 115 ROI Specification Marking the second ROI boundary End Coordinate of Horizontal Axis Otart Coordinate of Horizontal Axis HH Spectrum 29 Mar 17 0 E 414 counts 606 keV 3072 keV BE 4 P Horizontal Scale Zoom RT 1 1 8s Gc 1660 4 0 060 uSv h DI 0 696 Nc 258 foom 1 5MeV Figure 116 Spectrum Scale Complete spectrum visible Zoom 1 1 Every spectrum channel is represente
16. Next Measurement The scheduled time of the next measurement Measurements The number of measurements recorded since activating automated measurements 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 21 Send Identification 4 This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Send Data p 104 gt Send Identification This command initiates a multi step procedure to send a record of identification results stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database to a remote server see 9 p 219 L The procedure to send identification results is the same as that for sending spectra The only difference is in the contents of the file sent This description applies to both this and the Send Spectrum command see 6 22 p 140 You can choose from the identification results available in the database Figure 145 p 137 The date and time of saving the identification is displayed while you step through the available data III Identification 22 Mar 17 34 Choose Record Number 3 2011 03 22 16 44 30 minutes ago Figure 145 Sending Data Choosing a record of identification results Em If y
17. The duration of the background measurement is shown below the chart showing the measure ments Ifa background was measured since switching on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and you don t want to wait until the background is measured not recommended you can cancel the background mea surement The FLIR identiFINDER R300 will then use the most recent previous background mea surement After the background measurement has finished the Finder mode screen appears Figure 90 p 89 4 If your variant is equipped with a neutron detector the current neutron rate is displayed at the bottom of the screen The current count rate is averaged for a period you can specify see 6 30 p 157 The average of the most recent period is visualized as a wide column along the right edge of the screen Narrow columns representing older periods fill the screen s center from right to left pushing the oldest periods off the screen s left edge 4 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes Finder Background 18 Mar 11 03 Ee Current Count Rate 15 S of 30 5 Measuring Duration Figure 89 Finder mode Initial background measurement pj 18 aL s EEUU ctt ELCHE ida Cold m EO L LL T zi i Bs A Lr ZI E Current Count Rate Count Rate Exceeded the rn me Deep Threshold Count Rate History Current Neutron Rate Current Dose Rate Available only for variante 0 196 uSv h N 0 000 cps equipped with a neutr
18. ambient temperature 5a 70 3 mm 2 77 in x 33 8 mm 1 33 in x 125 5 mm 4 94 in 340 g 11 99 oz 370 g 13 05 oz Aluminium 20 C 50 C 4 F 122 F 10 C 35 C 50 F 95 F Temperature change must not exceed 8 4 C 15 1 F min 10 93 non condensing According to ANSI N42 48 2008 IP63 according to IEC 60529 Internal Li ion single cell rechargeable 1950 mAh 3 7 V 25 C 77 F 300 500 full charge discharge cycles 3a 5a lt 3 hat 25 C 77 F when instrument off and connected to AC power charger and gt 5 5 h when powered via USB gt 24 hat 25 C 77 F in dose rate mode with dimmed display back light and GPS switched off Transflective color LCD Size Central Luminance Annunciators Blue LED Red LED Green LED Vibrator Beeper Memory Data Storage Capacity Identifications incl Spectrum Screenshots Alarms Input Output USB Bluetooth Software Embedded Software Web Interface IPv4 IPv6 Download File Formats Reachback Accessories DC Power Adapter Charger Car Power Adapter Charger Connection Cable Holster Carrying Case A Info Pool 55 88 mm 2 20 in 320 pixel x 240 pixel 400 cd m typically Neutron detection and alarm Gamma alarm Power status Alarm reporting Alarm reporting 2 GB internal memory 1800 MB available for the user 600000 2500 1000000 USB 2 0 mini B socket lt 50 m 164 04 ft ran
19. played at the time the alarm condition was met for example Figure 101 p 99 The screen backlight will be switched on if it timed out 6 9 p 122 The alarm details remain on the screen until you dismiss them Status Bar If you dismiss the alarm details the alarm and warning information is shown in the status bar along the display s top edge alternating with the normal information shown there Fig ure 100 p 98 LED LEDs Figure 7 p 28 flash in several patterns Beeper The beeper emits various sound patterns Vibrator The vibrator shakes the instrument and adds a little sound 9 You can switch the LEDs the beeper and the vibrator on or off see 6 32 p 160 All alarms are stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database including date and time always and GPS coordinates if switched on and available see 6 11 p 127 You can review saved alarms via the web interface 8 13 p 206 or delete them 6 17 p 133 5 1 Gamma Alarms Settings and Commands Switch off the beeper and vibrator for the current alarm The next alarm if any reactivates sound and vibration Acknowledge Acknowledge the alarm The beeper and the vibrator are switched off see Mute above and the screen returns to the content displayed before the alarm was raised Figure 100 p 98 The alarm details however will alternate with the standard information in the title bar until the radiation drops below the alarm thre
20. power source or Usethe auto adapter to connectthe FLIR identiFINDER R300 to an appropriate power source or Connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a computer at Charging is a lot faster when you use the power supply of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 because it supplies a much higher current than a host conforming to the USB standard 2 Observe the power indicator see 2 1 p 29 if the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is running while charging 11 2 1 Charging Durations Shortest charging durations are achieved with e the FLIR identiFINDER R300 switched off and e the FLIR identiFINDER R300 connected to the wall mounted power supply shipped with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Under these conditions charging takes about 3 hours Q We recommend leaving the power supply connected for a longer time for example over night if circumstances allow Charging the batteries will take longer if e the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is switched on or e the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is powered by a USB connected computer because the power supply ofthe FLIR identiFINDER R300 supplies a much higher currentthan a host conforming to the USB standard X If the batteries are completely discharged we recommend to charge them while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is switched off Wait at least 15 min after connecting the power adapter before you switch on the instrument K When reliable batteries with higher capacity become available we will build them into our prod
21. refreshed only every other second 8 16 Live Spectrum Web Page ES Live Spectrum gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Spectrum p 106 The main feature of this web page Figure 218 p 210 is the live spectrum chart A The live spectrum shown here is independent from the spectrum you can view on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 see 6 2 p 106 Buttons above the chart provide commands to acquire and manage spectra buttons below the chart influence the display of the data 8 16 Live Spectrum Web Page Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info S Settings iS Data i Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Live Spectrum Spectrum Counts Energy Range Gross counts O Saved Data Spectrum Data MeTme O 4889 Acquisition Data Gamma Count Rate ees Available only for variants detector 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 218 Empty live spectrum page identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Starts the acquisition of data A The FLIR identiFINDER R300 interrupts other operations during the acquisition You will be notified on the instruments screen see 4 5 p 95 The spectrum chart and the information shown below the chart are updated every second Figure 219 p 213 9 The current spectrum is not cleared before recording data that is new measurements are add
22. setting 225 Search key function 145 224 225 Select key function 36 38 41 43 46 82 118 122 125 127 128 137 143 146 148 150 153 155 159 164 225 Self Test command 104 134 Semiconductor Radiation Detector 285 Send key function 81 92 114 115 138 Send Data menu 104 Send Identification command 137 Send Identification key function 92 114 Send Identification command 104 Send Spectrum command 140 Send Spectrum key function 115 Send Spectrum 4 command 104 Sensitivity setting 158 Serial Number property 130 Service web section 179 Set Password command 104 128 Settings o Alarm 163 164 Alarm 162 164 Available 158 Backlight 124 Beeper 161 Bluetooth Device Name 145 Change Device 145 Colors 123 Confidence 117 Connection String 150 Counts 122 Date 127 Device Name 152 Disconnect 143 Displayed Unit 159 Duration 117 Enable SPP 143 Extra Duration 117 GPS 128 HTTP URI 150 Integration Time 158 Key Functions 124 Language 124 LEDs 160 Live Time 122 n42 2006 155 n42 2012 154 Nuclides 118 120 Operator Name 153 Password 150 Phone Number 150 Real Time 122 SD1000 225 Sensitivity 158 Severity 118 Time 127 Time Interval 135 Time Zone 126 Timeout 124 143 U Pu 118 Usage 118 USB Subnet 153 User Name 150 ay 155 Vibrator 161 Voice Phone 153 Warning 162 164 Set
23. 112 118 Spectrum Scale One display pixel equals the width of one spectral channel 112 119 Spectrum Scale The defined ROI fits into the available screen width 113 120 Choosing a saved spectrum to be loaded for display 113 121 Radionuclides identified in the current spectrum cee eee eee 114 122 Checking the calibration s adde dod 45444405450 op cm cm ede de de m cede Rm ede ESOS 116 123 Upper items of the identification settings saos ooo onn omncm xxm 9o homo des 117 124 Top ofthe nuclide list used by the identification algorithm 119 125 Usage information in the nuclide list used by the identification algorithm 120 126 Severity information in the nuclide list used by the identification algorithm 121 127 Preset times for spectrum data acquisition aaa aaa enreda a eS 122 128 Display settings in daytime Colors uos ou s won s m mono wo EA xk seruus 123 129 Display settings in nighttime colors 4 e 123 130 Display settings in classic colors o oo 124 131 Setting date and time while GPS clock is not available 125 132 Clock Settings Selecting the time zone uu sso os m m m ow REOR CS EO x E EO Ex m xo oon 126 133 Clock Settings Selecting the time zone sor sor 126 Ioi GPS ON annn ro 127 135 Entering a new password 325229 5 x5922222522 25 5 SEER ES 129 136 Entering
24. 2 3 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Holster For general monitoring ofthe environment for gamma or neutron radiation you can insert the FLIR identiFINDER R300 into its holster Figure 39 p 50 and wear iton your belt Figure 40 p 50 You can still hear and feel the alarms and watch the alarm LEDs Figure 39 Inserting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 into a holster so alarm LEDs remain visible Figure 40 FLIR identiFINDER R300 in a belt holster with visible alarm LEDs 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server To access the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s web interface simply point your web browser to one of the addresses given after a connection between your computer and the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is established see 7 4 p 178 Provided a network connection can be established you can use any modern browser running on for example a desktop or laptop PC a netbook a tablet or a smart phone The browser must support e HTML 5 e CSS3 e Javascript e Scalable Vector Graphics SVG The following examples were successfully tested e Apple Safari 5 Microsoft Windows Mac OS X e Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 Microsoft Windows e Mozilla Firefox 20 Linux Microsoft Windows Mac OS X e Opera 10 6 Microsoft Windows The FLIR identiFINDER R300 web access needs no cookies If cookies are allowed they are used to remember your settings for example the number of items you prefer in listings
25. 24 1 Operating the Web Server Pages The web pages ofthe FLIR identiFINDER R300 are available in slightly different layouts for different screen or window widths A narrow version Figure 41 p 52 is used on mobile devices like smart phones or tablet computers The wider version Figure 42 p 53 is used on desktop or laptop computers The instrument serving these web pages is identified in the page header which also contains the menus and several status indicators Y If you print a web page the page header is suppressed The title of the current web page is shown in the main area below the page header The content of most web pages is divided into sections of related items 9 A tool tip giving details about elements of web pages is shown if you hover and stay with the pointer above an element Not available on touch driven devices without pointer 2 4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Serial Number 103156000000 SFLIR Number ManoRaider oe Page Header 7 N a Menu Button Type of Instrument Battery Status Inf Page Title A EA GPS Status Model nanoRaider ZH Serial Number 103156000000 Software Version 2014 3 Available Memory 94 Spectroscopic Detector One CdZnTe 15x13x5 Dose Rate Detector Two additional CdZnTe 15x13x5 Neutron Detector He tube 3He3 608 15NS Mia Service Americas Main Page Sections FLIR Detection Inc Area 100 Midlan
26. 70 3 Locate the source of the radiation see 3 3 p 73 4 Identify the nuclides that gamma radiation is originating from see 3 4 p 75 5 Transfer the results to a local computer for further processing see 3 5 p 77 6 Send the results to a remote service see 3 6 p 81 7 Turn off the instrument see 3 7 p 84 X Please familiarize yourself with the names and positions of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s parts and the general methods of operation chapter 2 p 27 before proceeding with this chapter Chapter 6 p 103 provides information about all operations and describes the operations men tioned here in more detail More precise pointers into the reference will be provided with the op eration steps outlined below The instructions outlined in this chapter assume a variant with a neutron detector A 1 p 237 and with factory settings 3 1 Switching On and Checking the Instrument 3 1 Switching On and Checking the Instrument This description assumes normal operation of the instrument For a detailed description of the startup procedure refer to section 2 5 p 62 gt To start up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 1 Press and hold O for a moment until the screen backlight appears 2 Release the key Wait a moment while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 e identifies itself e goes through start up procedures e initializes the software Figure 63 p 70 Initializing Battery 0 Software
27. FLIR Radiation Figure 222 Web page to change the administrator password Transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 8 19 System Files Web Page R Administration p 181 gt System Files This web page Figure 223 p 217 lets you download or delete log files from your FLIR identiFINDER R300 These logs are created in certain circumstances and might help our service and support personnel to identify problems Available Files This section Figure 223 p 217 lists the available files Em The collection of available files depends on the history of your instrument Not all of the files shown in Figure 223 p 217 are always available on all instruments Delete the listed system file from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Download Download the listed system file to your computer dant CIRINECD p9nni sns 9014 11129921 E5Enah9n01E EE identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Settings Data i Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration System Files Available Files 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 223 System files web page identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 9 Sending Data to a Remote Server Chapter 9 Sending Data to a Remote Server The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can transfer data via the Internet to a remote server for further pro cessing like reachback analysis
28. Scaling of Cursor Decoration Vertical Axis Horizontal Scale Cursor Line 3 Zoom RI 1 1 8s Gc 1660 4 0 060 uSv h DI 0 696 Nc 258 Cursor Skip Figure 112 Spectrum with cursor at local peak Move the cursor to the left If you pass the left edge the cursor wraps around to the right edge Cursor Right gt Move the cursor to the right If you pass the right edge the cursor wraps around to the left edge Region of Interest ROI You can mark a part of a spectrum for closer inspection The region of interest is defined by its left and right boundaries which you can set with the cursor Figure 113 p 110 Mark Channel Define a boundary of the ROI at the current cursor position Up to two boundaries are possi ble 3 It does not matter which boundary of the ROI you mark first 1 Ifthisisthe first marker you set it will be decorated with diamonds Figure 114 p 110 2 Ifthisisthe second marker you set both markers will be decorated with triangles point ing into the defined ROI Figure 115 p 111 3 If you try to set a third marker the old marker closest to the current position will be removed before setting the new marker identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN 6 2 Spectrum M Spectrum 79 counts 504 keV 3072 keV x cm Cursor Decoration RT 1 1 8s Gc 1660 4 0 060 uSv h DI 0 696 Nc 258 Cursor Figure 113 ROI Specification Moving the cursor
29. Time Interval setting 135 Time Zone setting 126 Timeout setting 124 143 Total Time 287 Trickle Charging 287 True Time 287 Type property 199 207 U U Pu setting 118 U 235 key function 116 Uncertainty property 116 Uniform Resource Identifier URI 287 Unit Prefixes 287 Units of Time 287 Universal Serial Bus 288 Up key function 119 121 URI 288 Usage setting 118 USB Universal Serial Bus 288 USB Subnet setting 153 User Interface web section 180 User Name setting 150 User Name property 227 UTC 288 V Value property 207 Vibrator setting 161 Voice Phone setting 153 W Warning setting 162 164 Warnings 97 Gamma 98 Neutrons 101 Weapons Grade Plutonium WGPu 288 Web Menus Administration 181 Data 180 Home 179 Settings 180 Web Pages Alarm 180 Alarms 180 Backup 180 Bluetooth SPP Settings 4 180 Bulk Download 180 Connectivity 180 General 180 GPS and Clock 180 Identifications 180 Info 179 Live Screen 180 Live Spectrum 181 Nuclides 180 Password 181 Resources 180 Screenshots 180 Software Update 181 Spectra 180 System Files 181 Web Sections Alarm Indicators 180 Available Files 181 Backup 180 Bluetooth SPP Settings 4 180 Clock 180 Data Schemata 180 Data Types 180 Date Selection 180 Download Options 180 Gamma Alarms 180 GPS 180 Identification 180 Local Area Network 180 Measurement 180 Neutr
30. X Device driver software installed successfully Figure 198 End of the installation gt To remove the driver software 1 Open the Windows System Control Panel 2 OpenProgramiPrograms and Features 3 Selectthe FLIR RNDIS Driver from the list by clicking its entry 4 Click Uninstall and follow the instructions given on screen 7 4 Using the Network Connection When you connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to an appropriately configured computer see 7 3 p 171 it will show its addresses Figure 199 p 178 M Information 23 Mar 14 32 EJ Information To use the web interface point your browser to any one of http nanoRaider flir http 103156000000 fli http 172 16 0 1 Figure 199 Valid addresses of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 after a connection to a computer was established One address contains the serial number of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 the other is an IP address according to the current settings see 6 26 p 152 To access the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s web in terface simply point your web browser to one of the given addresses for example to the IP address http 172 16 0 1 AN Not all computers can use the address comprising the instrument s serial number Please use the IP address in this case identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Chapter 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server In principle the web int
31. gt Start Time 2010 08 25 14 02 2010 08 25 14 02 2010 08 25 14 02 2010 08 25 14 02 2010 08 25 14 02 2010 08 25 10 08 2010 08 25 10 03 2010 08 25 10 03 2010 08 25 10 03 2010 08 25 10 20 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Administration Saved on 2010 08 25 14 08 2010 08 25 14 08 2010 08 25 14 05 2010 08 25 14 04 2010 08 25 14 04 2010 08 25 12 13 2010 08 25 10 04 2010 08 25 10 04 2010 08 25 10 03 2010 08 25 10 02 Real Time 118 0 s nep moe v Figure 212 Table of spectrum records Spectrum Details Web Page Details of a single record are shown on an individual page Figure 213 p 205 which you can open from the table of records Figure 212 p 203 by clicking E Show For the navigation of records and other common elements of record pages refer to section 2 4 3 p 56 To download the shown record click and follow the directions given by your web browser The name of the downloaded zip archive begins with the serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 followed by the type and the reference number of the record for example 103156000000 Spectrum 4711 zip The downloaded archive contains files in several formats The file names comprise the type of data and the reference number of the record m s 1 y Y EW lsalatat Y fora YN MIET 739472 ED DAS p a DAA E ANTI f Y m AS ho e fave Zl Lia J
32. identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 Table of identification result records 4 24666 6 ee RR RRERER ERS See Es 200 Details of an identification result record usum mw er ee ee nee EX EX 201 Table of spectrum TOCOPQS 2144444 xRREREREREREPRSSSASSPSSGSEGx 203 Details of a spectrum record renean 205 Table of alarm records a a ma 206 Details of an alarm record cir 207 Table of screenshots o 208 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 s screen live in the web interface 209 Empty live spectrum page nonoa omo x oom 9 9 3 9 30X 3 Ee a 210 Live spectrum page during data acquisition 213 Identification results of a live spectrum ccr 214 File upload web page coo w ws wm x3 53433 93 3 3 33 mo 9 o 9 9 5 9 0 d d 215 Web page to change the administrator password 216 System files web page suo ook Ro oon eee neck op b ox om 99m Romo eom idadi 217 A possible scenario for remote handling of FLIR identiFINDER R300 data 219 Connection for uploading FLIR identiFINDER R300 data to a remote server 221 Select Change Device if an unwanted device is paired 224 Prepare your Bluetooth devices appears after selecting Change device 224 Searching for Bluetooth devices 22422 ce kee ee we or rr 224 No Bluetooth devices detected uou mono cero S YSYEYE9x1T1234322393 d pP 55 2
33. p see 8 10 p see 8 11 p see 8 12 p 202 see 8 13 p 206 see 8 14 p 207 see 8 15 p 208 182 182 183 184 184 184 186 186 186 187 188 188 189 190 190 192 193 194 196 196 197 197 197 199 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server see 8 16 p 209 see 8 17 p 215 see 8 18 p 215 see 8 19 p 216 Available Files gt ev LL SSSiSenennmm KR Km RRIIIR see 8 19 p 216 8 1 Info Web Page ES Home p 179 Info This web page displays diverse information regarding your FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 200 p 182 System This section Figure 200 p 182 contains information aboutthe FLIR identiFINDER R300 and its configuration a Home p 179 gt Info p 181 gt System gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Maintenance p 104 gt Show Status p 130 E You should have this information ready when contacting our service see 8 1 p 181 or B 4 p 257 Service This section Figure 200 p 182 contains the addresses of our service for various communi cation methods like traditional mail fax etc LS Home p 179 gt Info p 181 Service If you click the link to a service e mail address your standard e mail software will open with a new message already containing the relevant data of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 like serial number versions
34. p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt General Options p 104 GPS Settings LS Settings p 180 GPS and Clock p 186 gt GPS p 186 This screen Figure 134 p 127 groups settings regarding the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s GPS re ceiver UL Settings 24 Mar NER GPS GPS On Exit Down Figure 134 GPS Settings identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 12 Set Password Settings and Commands GPS Switch the GPS receiver On or Off factory default 4z The GPS receiver draws a significant amount of power you should switch it off if you don t need it especially while running on batteries If the GPS receiver is on and the reception is good enough the GPS coordinates of the current location are stored with alarms spectra identification results etc If the GPS reception is not good enough for example inside buildings the current location cannot be determined If a location could be determined from GPS data since you switched on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 the last valid location is used Otherwise the position of the intersection of the Greenwich Meridian with the Equator is used 0 N 0 E Additionally the clock of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is set according to the high precision time received from the GPS satellites see 6 10 p 125 D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details 000 Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the supe
35. played press to reveal the command Figure 78 p 81 III Identification 24 Mar 17 51 E 4 Nuclides 9 Eu 152 ND Identification saved as N 77 Figure 78 Identification results 2 Initiate the data transfer with A A summary of the record is shown Figure 79 p 82 3 Start the data transfer with RETA During the transfer of data you will be kept posted about the progress of the transmission steps Figure 80 p 82 If this is the first time you are sending data since switching on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 you have to pair it with your Bluetooth phone Please refer to section 6 23 3 p 144 for the complete details identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tr 3 6 Sending Results to a Remote Server g Send Type Identification Record Number 77 Saved on 2011 03 25 at 09 27 GPS Coordinates Included Figure 79 Identification result summary for sending MO Sending data 25 Mar 11 32 Sending data Preparing eden Activating Bluetooth Succeeded Connecting Started Sending Done Figure 80 Data transmission progress gt To pair with a Bluetooth device 1 Press Figure 81 p 83 to have the FLIR identiFINDER R300 search for suitable Bluetooth devices 2 Choose the desired Bluetooth device from the list shown Figure 82 p 83 with CD 3 To start the pairing with the chosen device press GT Your device might require addi tional steps like
36. 08 25 09 45 Real Time 364 05 Live Time 362 05 Dead Time 0 5 Counts 62 Energy Range 234 237 keV Gross counts 4853 Dose Rate Data Maximum 0 970 uSv h Average 0 821 uSv h Minimum 0 690 uSv h Duration 364 s Neutron Data Minimum 0 counts Maximum 0 counts Total 0 counts Duration 364 s Figure 77 Details of an identification result record Download identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 3 Field Operating Guide 3 6 Sending Results to a Remote Server This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 You can transfer identification results or spectra to a remote server for further processing or anal ysis An ANSI N42 42 file p 269 containing the data is sent from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a cell phone via short range Bluetooth radio and from the phone to the remote server via the Internet The connection requires some initial setup on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and on the mobile phone please refer to section 9 p 219 for details gt To send identification result records to a remote server AN These instructions assume that your FLIR identiFINDER R300 and your cell phone are correctly prepared Consult section 9 p 219 or your IT administrator for help 1 While the identification results for example of section 3 4 p 75 Figure 72 p 76 are dis
37. 3 Initiate a search for devices with Figure 156 p 145 O0 Bluetooth Periphery 23 Mar 15 08 Search Prepare your Bluetooth devices to be found and press Start search to start a search sweep for them Figure 156 Ready to search for Bluetooth devices 4 Wait a few moments while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 searches for Bluetooth devices supporting the required protocol Figure 157 p 146 5 You can repeat the search if no device was found Figure 158 p 146 with EX 6 Choose the desired Bluetooth device from the list shown Figure 159 p 147 with E The device names are listed exactly as received from the detected devices In case of ambiguous names you should change the name of the Bluetooth device to some thing unique refer to the manuals of your Bluetooth devices on how to achieve that N i p Y If your desired device is not shown in the list make sure its setup is correct press 249 select the command Bluetooth Periphery again and start another search identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 ee 7 6 23 Bluetooth O0 Bluetooth Periphery 23 Mar 15 27 woo Searching Searching for bluetooth devices in range If your device does not show up check that it is configured correctly Cancel Figure 157 Searching for Bluetooth devices O0 Bluetooth Periphery 23 Mar 15 50 E Search failed No suitable Bluetooth device found Do you want to search agai
38. 3 2 43 3 2 2 9 9 9 5 3 9242232229955 3 66 63 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 General system status 70 64 Dose BAG THOU uan omo 3 X Xo x9 939 9335 59 023G PST53524444343 71 65 Surveying an object with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 72 66 Dose rate warning reported on screen e 72 D identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection 67 Optimum posture for neutron detection lel 73 68 Finder mode Initial background measurement c 74 69 Finder mode Continuous measurement eller s 74 70 Spectrum acquisition in Identification Mode 75 71 Finding the position for best measurements 76 72 Identification reSultS lt lt a hh e 76 73 Spectrum the identification is based upon o 77 74 Valid IP address after a connection was established 78 75 The FLIR identiFINDERR300 s home page o 2 4 78 76 Table of identification result records o es 79 77 Details of an identification result record lr 80 78 Identification reSultS o 4 e rns 81 79 Identification result summary for sending ee ee 82 80 Data transmission progress xoxo nod 3 o3 3 3 3 3 3 3 309 4 29 9 9
39. Association but has also been adopted by the Bluetooth Special Interest Group and the SyncML wing of the Open Mobile Alliance Also known as IrOBEX Pairing A mechanism to establish a trusted connection between two devices communicating via Blue tooth requiring user interaction only during the first connection of two particular devices PAN Personal Area Networking Particle Radiation A type of Radiation whose emission components carry a finite rest mass Alpha Radiation and Beta Radiation are examples for Particle Radiation PE Polyethylene Peak The place where a function or a measurement or a graphic rendering thereof is higher than in the close vicinity Figure 242 p 274 Also known as Local Maximum D Glossary Personal Area Networking PAN A Bluetooth communications profile to connect a small number of devices over usually short distances Also known as Piconet PHA Pulse Height Analyzer Photo Multiplier Tube PMT An extremely sensitive light detector used for example in conjunction with a Scintillator to register lonizing Radiation Piconet Personal Area Networking PIN Personal Identification Number PMMA Polymethyl Methacrylate PMT Photo Multiplier Tube Polyethene Polyethylene Polyethylene PE C H A substance usable as Moderator for fast 4Neutrons Also known as Polyethene Polymethylene Polythene Polymethyl Methacrylate PMMA C Hg0 A substance usable as Modera
40. Clear Password ANNAN a REE ee m 129 6 14 Show Status d bance eoo ene RA RS A Rees eq EE E EE EE SEE RE SE 130 6 15 Reset Factory Settings eoe oson x OR Ox ORO RRR DESK OR ROROR OR RO x M x 132 616 Erase AL Spectra sp Eb E E Rob sk ub ub Rob sb db eps dme om exo om cmm a 133 bL Trae AAN 1 221 228 9 9 9 dm 9 9 3 5 9 75 ETERS SES mp m eR REE 133 618 Erase All Screenshots 2er n So a 134 G19 AGE ITEM erro rs rro 134 6 20 Automated Mode SettidgS mera 135 6 21 Send Identification s s saasa saara aaa 9 SE EEEEEEEEE RES S OS 137 Da SURG PEN 140 Eod PODO aaa aaa 4949 a es 19 ase 776 728 AAA 141 623 1 Blu t oth SPP Status lt lt 2 22 eee 2688 LE eR RR 4x 141 6234 Bluetooth SPP Settings cra ee haa UR olt oc ee grs 142 6 23 3 Bluetooth Periphery unos uoce cR cR RO OR Se E d OEE ee SEBO Ee e s 144 6 24 Remote server Settings 2c cee ce ee REE DEE EBS 149 Goo MASS Sgecu TT 150 EH TOW tee ee ee 19 26 32 een eee 19 79 19 18 78 16 36 39 76 RA Xx e 152 bul Peport 259 9743 PTO 555 53551599 299593595959 d SEES 153 6 28 Download Settings ec cea ee eee POR 8995 99 5 8 9 9 P 19 P RS PR B3 d 154 6 29 Gamma Neutron Counters 00 cee a a a a a a 155 6 30 Finder Settings ccoo sere IEEE 157 Dot Dose Rite cies sue ww eesS 552 2 4d4 d 45494 55 39 159 Eos Alarm IPIE IDE ES uus uo asas 4o 4o 4o 49 49 49 9 9 97978 78 3979 78 a 7418 2S EORR UR RT e be AUR URL a am 160 633 Dose Alar Thresh lds 153 3 ERES
41. Computer Depending on the operating system of your computer you might need to install additional software to access the web interface see 8 p 179 of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 1 3 1 Linux No special installation is required for recent Linux distributions Fedora 13 Ubuntu 10 04 Ubuntu 11 04 and Ubuntu 12 04 were tested successfully There should be a good chance with other mod ern distributions as well Just connectthe FLIR identiFINDER R300 to the computer with the included cable and you are ready to go 1 3 2 Windows XP You must install the driver software included within the FLIR identiFINDER R300 before you can use the USB network connection of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 A This installation requires you to have administrator privileges for your computer Ask your IT administrator if in doubt The driver installer is included with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 you can access it via the USB mass storage mode 7 2 p 170 gt To install the driver software 1 Start the mass storage connection from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer see 7 2 p 170 2 Open the folder Drivers containing the installer 3 Start the installer by double clicking its icon Figure 184 p 171 Figure 184 FLIR RNDIS driver installer 4 Follow the instructions given on screen Figure 185 p 172 If a FLIR RNDIS driver is already installed on your PC you will be guided through the deinstallation before
42. Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for FLIR Systems USB RNDIS Network Connection Q Iff your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do 8 Install the software automatically Recommended Install fram a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue Figure 190 Specifying a driver source 3 Click Install the software automatically Recommended to have the system search for the driver you installed as described above 4 Proceed to the following page by clicking Next 5 You might get asked whether to install this software Figure 191 p 174 Please click Continue Anyway Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware FLIR Systems USB RNDIS Network Connection has not passed Windows Logo testing to venty its compatibility with Windows XP hy is importar Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing STOP Installation Figure 191 Installation warning identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 7 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer The installation will finish in a few moments and yo
43. Info Z Settings Data Live Screen Type and Number of dentification NO 51 Record Live Spectrum gt 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Administration Navigation Buttons Identification Information Saved on Wed 2011 11 16 15 43 Neutron Alarm No Nuclide Information Spectrum Information Start Time Fri 2010 10 08 13 31 Real Time 81 95 Live Time 81 85 Dead Time 0 1 120 Counts 62 Energy Range 234 237 keV 100 Gross counts 4853 80 60 40 20 0 0 100 Maximum 0 970 uSv h Average 0 821 uSv h Minimum 0 690 uSv h Duration 81s Minimum 0 counts Maximum 0 counts Total 0 counts Duration 81s Download y 2013 1 FLP Radiation gg Figure 46 Anatomy of a web page with details of a record Em Your computer must be connected to the Internet for this operation The transmission starts immediately and you will be kept posted about the progress Fig ure 48 p 58 You will be informed after the transmission finished Figure 49 p 59 or about transmission errors if any identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 g 2 4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server GPS Coordinates Longitude 74 TE Look Up with GeoHack EJ Figure 47 Web page section with GPS coordinates x Une Touch Reachback i Figure 48 Steps of the transmission of data to a reach
44. LN Choosing from Menus uu a eae a ee ee ow Scrolling m Menus gzaevue ake ee eeee rr 22 3 Changing ValS s a opos xo oom rm t nini SS S m ws 2 2 4 Changing Composite Valles 4343 dd dd aww ewww een ehh dS AAT Changing Numerical Values 1 5 oc oko om mcm x omo c om om a 2 2 6 Eoo EO ose aeae 15 3 1909 35 09 29 09 29 08 26 28 1 18 M1 Be E a sd Entering the Password serra rre Dd Pate a a x4 59555 9 55922221222222241519 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Holster 5 2 4422 65848 544554 04440 2 The FLIR identiFINDERR300 Web Server lt lt 2 4 1 Operating the Web Server Pages riera RRE 2 4 2 Tables on Web Papes PTT 2 4 3 Records on Web Pages 2s uoo nono da m cm cmm cm cm umo wo 2 4 4 octauo II EEE 2 4 5 Password ENUY AIN ANA 2 4 6 Administration ACCESS 635444546444 45 GR de de da a e a CR Mr ee 8 Starting Up th FLIR dentrINDERRSO a acacia ee a AAA FLIR Detection 2 6 Shutting Down the FLIR identiFINDERR300 64 27 Low Power Conditions eco eso rr 65 2 8 Resetting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 4 0 4 4 044 ee 4 e444 44k Raw eww OD 66 3 Field Operating Guide 69 3 1 Switching On and Checking the Instrument cnn 70 3 4 Observing the Environment 144 4444 6444 568 SSR EE SEEDS ee ee 70 Sul Gamma Radiation Survey snm RSS xSx Xe 3X saunas 70 3 2 2 Neutron Radiation AMV sucus AA 71 3 3 LocatingaRadiationSource eres 73 3 4 Identifying a Radiation Source
45. Number 130 Software 131 Start Time 202 Status 142 System 130 Type 199 207 Uncertainty 116 User Name 227 Value 207 Proton 282 Proton Number 283 Pulse Height Analyzer PHA 283 R R key function 47 Radiation 283 Radio Time 283 Radioactive Decay 283 Radiological Dispersal Device 283 Radiological Dispersion Device RDD 283 Radionuclide 284 Railway Time 284 RDD 284 Reachback 219 284 Reactor Grade Plutonium RGPu 284 Real Time RT 284 INDEX Real Time property 202 Real Time setting 122 Region of Interest ROI 284 rem 284 Remote Network Driver Interface Specification RNDIS 284 Remote Server web section 180 Remote Server Settings command 104 149 Report Settings command 104 153 Reports web section 180 Reset 66 Reset key function 132 157 Reset Dose key function 157 Reset Factory Settings command 104 132 Resolution 284 Resources web page 180 Restore web section 180 RGPu 284 RID 284 Right key function 35 41 43 127 150 154 162 163 RNDIS 284 ROI 284 R ntgen Equivalent in Man rem 285 RT 285 RT key function 114 S Satellites property 131 Save key function 112 Saved on property 199 202 Saving Energy 231 Saving Power 231 Scaling property 106 Scintillation Counter 285 Scintillator 285 Screenshot 49 Screenshots property 130 Screenshots web page 180 SD1000
46. Numerical Values Changing the selected digit 42 26 Changing Numerical Values Selecting digits bbe 99x rra 42 27 Editing Text First character J is selected 5 222222 20072 02 884488 43 28 Editing Text Next character to the right is selected o 2 222222 44 29 Editing Text Set of available characters cocos aaa 44 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 List of Figures FLIR Detection 30 Editing Text After changing the selected o to an a 44 31 Editing Text About to delete the selected character h o 45 32 Editing Text After deleting a character the next character is selected 45 33 Editing Text After inserting space before Doe for an additional character 46 34 THUS lexi DONG aaa qp ag OR URL a OR OR BLUR A 46 35 Entering a password to access the option menus llle 0 47 36 Password entered but not yet confirmed eee eee es 48 37 Message after entering a wrong password saoao e 48 38 Status display showing the number of saved screenshots 49 39 Inserting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 into a holster so alarm LEDs remain visible 50 40 FLIR identiFINDER R300 in a belt holster with visible alarm LEDs 50 41 Anatomy of a FLIR identiFINDER R300 web page narrow layout 52 42 Anatomy of a FLIR identiFINDER R300 web page widelayout
47. Options key function 88 90 Options Menu menu 103 Overload 87 P Pairing 281 PAN 281 Particle Radiation 281 Password setting 150 Password web page 181 Password property 227 PE 281 Peak 281 Peak FWHM property 116 Peak Position property 116 Personal Area Networking PAN 282 PHA 282 Phone Number setting 150 Phone Number property 227 Photo Multiplier Tube PMT 282 Piconet 282 PIN 282 PMMA 282 PMT 282 Polyethene 282 Polyethylene PE C2H4 282 Polymethyl Methacrylate PMMA C Hg0 282 Polymethylene 282 Polythene 282 Positron 282 Potassium Chloride KCl 282 Power Saving 231 Preset key function 115 Presets command 104 121 Presets key function 115 Properties Acquisition Duration 106 Altitude 132 Available Memory 130 Beginning 206 Connection String 227 Counting Duration 156 Dead Time 106 Deviation 116 Discoverable 142 Dose Duration 156 Duration 206 Enable SPP 142 Gamma Count 106 Gamma Counts 156 Gamma Dose 156 GPS 131 Horizontal Coordinates 106 HTTP URI 228 IP Address 130 Latitude 132 Longitude 132 Measurements 136 Neutron Alarm 200 Neutron Count 106 Neutron Rate 157 Neutrons 157 INDEX Next Measurement 136 N2 199 202 206 Nuclide 115 Password 227 Peak FWHM 116 Peak Position 116 Phone Number 227 Real Time 202 Satellites 131 Saved on 199 202 Scaling 106 Screenshots 130 Serial
48. R300 Menu Reference Normal Commands are mapped to the 3 and keys as shown in this manual Swapped Commands mapped to the 0 and Q keys are exchanged D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 10 Clock Settings gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt General Options p 104 gt Clock Settings EROR settings p 180 gt GPS and Clock p 186 gt Clock p 187 You can check and change the settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s clock in this screen Fig ure 131 p 125 If the GPS receiver is switched on see 6 11 p 127 the received time sets the clock of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and the only setting you have to specify is your time zone Em If the clock setting seems unreasonable when switching on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 see 2 5 p 62 for example after the batteries were completely empty for a while this screen will show up and you will be asked to enter the correct date time and time zone settings M0 Settings 21 Mar 15 46 Se Ex L GPS Status Clock Time Zone GMT 08 00 Date 2011 Mar 21 at Only While GPS is Off Time 15 46 Pacific Time US amp Canada Figure 131 Setting date and time while GPS clock is not available identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 ta 7 6 10 Clock Settings ee l
49. SpectrumNumber gt ESA ANO Line3 Spectrum Number If the GetSpectra command has an Argument element then it must contain a name attribute with a value of Number and a value attribute with a numerical value specifying the record number of the spectrum to send t Omit the Argument element to retrieve highest spectrum number Listing A 9 GetSpectra Update 1 Spem SO CNN E MITES A Info Pool 2 lt Update name GetSpectra type nanoRaider id SerialNumber gt 3 Property name Spectra value base64 encoded n42 file gt 4 lt Update gt 0 Line 3 Spectra The GetSpectra update will contain a base64 encoded string which can be decoded into an ANSI N42 42 2006 p 269 file of the requested spectra The encoded data is represented in the example listing with the base64 encoded n42 file placeholder Base64 decoding is outside the scope of this document XK All commands and updates below this point provide properties that are already contained in the Status update message These are to be used if additional granularity is required A 7 4 Counts Listing A 10 Counts Command MS cogil SO A O E EIE E 2 Comneno iude COoumee gt Listing A 11 Counts Update A SO EC GE EIN lt Update name Counts type nanoRaider id SerialNumber gt 3 Property name Counts value 100 units counts gt 4 lt Update gt 0 A 7 5 Dose Rate Listing A 12 DoseRate Command 1 AMI AS on s A MS Comiena me
50. Update Ms og AS O A MEI 2 lt Update name Status type nanoRaider id SerialNumber gt 3 lt Property name BatteryLevel value 53 units pct gt 4 Property name Stabilization value true 5 Property name GMMode value true 6 Property name DoseRate value 10 units prem h gt 7 Property name Counts value 100 units counts gt 8 lt Property name NeutronRate value 10 units cps gt 9 lt Property name OperatingMode value Finder gt 10 lt Property name DoseRateWarningThres value 27 units prem h gt 11 Property name DoseRateAlarmThres value 20000 units prem h gt 12 lt Property name DoseWarningThres value 27 units mrem gt 13 lt Property name DoseAlarmThres value 20000 units mrem gt 14 Property name NeutronRateWarningThres value 27 units cps gt 15 Property name NeutronRateAlarmThres value 20000 units cps i6 Property name GPSValid value true gt 17 Property name Longitude value 84 2625 units deg A Info Pool 18 NS name o 3620 oo a e 19 lt Property name LastSpectrumNumber value 53 gt 20 lt Property name BatteryLow value false gt 2 Property name Overload value false gt 22 Property name Alarm value false gt 23 Property name DoseRateWarning value false 24 Property name DoseRateAlarm value false 25 Property name DoseAlarm v
51. a new password Confirmation osooso a e e AAA 129 137 Removing th password 2 s lt s xo ede x AAA AAA 130 138 FLIR identiFINDER R300 status display System o 131 139 FLIR identiFINDER R300 status display GPS 0 ooo 131 BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection 140 Reestablishing the factory default settings 132 141 Deleting saved Spear PEREIRA 133 142 Starting a self test of the FLIR identiFINDERR300 135 143 Testing the annunciators 3 4 oo oo wee da dad dada CR OR CR as OR DR DR OR m wwe 135 144 Automated Mode Settings eer rrr 136 145 Sending Data Choosing a record of identification results 137 146 Sending Data Identification summary ccr nn 138 147 Sending Data Incomplete settings lt ee ee 139 148 Sending Data Transmission progress e 139 149 Sending Data Mission accomplished cnn 140 150 Sending Data Choosing a spectrum aa a 141 151 Sending Data Spectrum summary saoao e a a oo SRR RRR EE REE HS 141 152 Buco PP e s ssrers sre eee ee eee DD RRR 2 29 2 3 3 3 3 9 3 d 142 las DUI perecer soria 143 154 Bluetooth Periphery anaa ob db eb ded m oom me komm m dede de ded 144 COR udo TT 144 156 Ready to search for Bluetooth devices o e e 1
52. active alarms Do you want to shut down Figure 58 Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 during an alarm 2 Low Power Conditions When the battery runs out of power an appropriate warning will be displayed Figure 59 p 65 ac companied by a characteristic sound Figure 60 p 65 The green status LED flashes with a higher frequency Figure 9 p 31 MM Low Battery 17 Mar 17 22 M The battery is low You should shut down your device Continue Shut Down Figure 59 Battery almost empty Figure 60 Schematic timing of triple beeps indicating low power conditions You can with 3 or using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with 0 until the bat tery is completely empty however the only remaining operation is the dose rate mode Figure 61 p 66 and 4 1 p 86 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN 2 8 Resetting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 9 Dose Rate EM 0 055 van 0 000 cps Neutrons Shut Down Figure 61 Low Power Dose Rate Mode If the battery is completely empty another message Figure 62 p 66 will appear accompanied by a characteristic sound Figure 60 p 65 BH Low Battery 18 Mar 09 07 The battery is empty Your device shuts down in 60 seconds Shut Down Figure 62 Battery is empty You should switch off the instrument Please connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to an external power source see 11 1 p 229 28 R
53. as Beta Radiation The 7 Decay of Neutrons to Protons emits beta particles and antineutrinos Also known as f Particle Beta Radiation A Particle Radiation of Beta Particles Beta Radiation can usually be shielded by a sheet of metal for example Al foil Figure 245 p 283 Beta radiation ionizes the surface of organisms and can lead to severe burns with long term sequelae like skin cancer Also known as B Radiation Bluetooth A standardized open wireless technology for data communication over short distances using radio waves Bq A Becquerel C Ha Polyethylene C H302 Polymethyl Methacrylate Cadmium Zinc Telluride CZT CdZnTe An alloy of cadmium telluride and zinc telluride a substance to build Semiconductor Radi ation Detectors usable at room temperature Calibration A defined procedure for the comparison of the reading of an instrument to the value conven tionally accepted as correct a standard D Glossary Inless strict use ofthe term calibration is regarded as including the adjustment of the reading ofthe instrument to agree with the standard within a specified accuracy Also known as Adjustment CBRNE Acronym for chemical biological radiological nuclear and explosive It refers to incidents or weapons presenting any of these hazards CdZnTe Cadmium Zinc Telluride Cesium Lithium Yttrium Chloride CLYC Cs LiYCl Ce Substance to build Scintillation Counter
54. blue Further tests regard the alarm LEDs the vibrator and the beeper Follow the list of tests displayed Figure 143 p 135 and verify that the annunciators are working Return to the superior menu 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference hi IIR T T mn Self Test 22 Mar 10 37 Self Test Starting the self test will show different color patterns test the vibrator the LEDs and the beeper Figure 142 Starting a self test of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Annunciator Test Red LED Done Blu e LED Done Available only for variants equipped with a ca neutron detector Vibrator On Beeper Figure 143 Testing the annunciators 6 20 Automated Mode Settings gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Data Logging p 104 gt Automated Mode Settings E settings p 180 General p 184 Measurement p 184 This screen Figure 144 p 136 groups settings regarding the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s auto mated identification mode see 4 4 p 93 Settings and Commands Time Interval Choose one of the available intervals for automated identification measurements Off 10 min 15 min 30 min 60 min On Dose Rate Warning E The scheduled times will be rounded relative to the full hour identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 rr ee 6 20 Automated Mode Settings Automated Mode Time Interval 15 min Next Measurement 17 15 Measurements 3
55. character to the right is selected o For the selected character Figure 30 p 44 you can use the commands o and Qv cycle through the available characters in the sequence shown in Figure 29 p 44 Use the web interface see 8 p 179 to enter international characters like e f 6 fi f tc I SSAR OLI UT HP 0 0123456789 Space abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Figure 29 Editing Text Set of available characters mugs TT ETETIE REA Reports Operator Name JElnDe Selected Entry Field Selected Character Voice Phone 1 800 555 0142 Change Selected 4 2 Figure 30 Editing Text After changing the selected o to an a Reveal More Commands To delete the selected character use Figure 31 p 45 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 1 Settings 23 Mar 12 21 2 Reports Selected Entry Field Operator Name Jain Doe Selected Character Voice Phone 1 800 555 0142 Delete Selected Character Delete Figure 31 Editing Text About to delete the selected character h Reveal More Commands The characters from the selected one to the end of the text will be moved towards the beginning to fill the gap Figure 32 p 45 TL Settings NS Reports Operator Name JafJDoe E Selected Entry Field Selected Character Voice Phone 1 800 555 0142 Delete
56. entering a PIN Use the PIN shown on your FLIR identiFINDER R300 screen Figure 83 p 83 4 Your FLIR identiFINDER R300 displays some details about the paired device and is ready to send data EEUU identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection O Bluetooth Periphery 25 Mar 10 13 EJ Search Prepare your Bluetooth devices to be found and press Start search to start a search sweep for them Start search Figure 81 Ready to search for Bluetooth devices O0 Bluetooth Periphery 25 Mar 10 22 Down Figure 82 List of suitable Bluetooth devices detected O0 Bluetooth Periphery 25 Mar 11 00 Nx Information Pairing ls in progress Check your device if further steps are needed The PIN is Cancel Figure 83 Pairing with a Bluetooth device identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN 3 7 Switching Off 3 7 Switching Off After you are done with all your measurements you should shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The details on shutting down are given in section 2 6 p 64 the recommended procedure follows gt To shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 1 Press and hold After a couple of seconds the shut down screen will be displayed Figure 84 p 84 110 Shut Down 24 Mar 14 59 YE Shut Down Do you want to shut down Shut Down Cancel Figure 84 Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 Press 5 to confirm t
57. etc identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tt 8 2 Resources Web Page 5 8 a us Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Home Settings Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Info System Serial Number 103156000000 Software Version 2014 3 Spectroscopic Detector One CdZnTe 15x13x5 Dose Rate Detector Two additional CdZnTe 15x13x5 Neutron Detector He tube 3He3 508 15N5 Service Americas Service Europe Africa Middle East Service Asia Pacific FLIR Detection Inc FLIR Detection Inc FLIR Detection Inc 100 Midland Road Luxemburgstraat 2 3 Pickering Street 03 49 Oak Ridge TN 37830 232 Meer Nankin Row USA Belgium Singapore 048660 T 41 865 220 8 00 T 32 0 3665 5106 T 165 6822 1596 F41 865 220 7187 F 32 0 3303 5624 radiation supporteflir com radiation supportEflir com radiation support flir com detectionsupport com radiation detectionsupport com radiation detectionsupport com radiation 2014 3 FLIR Radiation Figure 200 Info web page 8 2 Resources Web Page E Home p 179 Resources This web page Figure 201 p 183 provides access to various resources stored on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Open Source Software This section Figure 201 p 183 provides information about the open source libraries used in the software of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 ES Home p 179 Resources p 182 gt Open Source Software identiFINDER R300 en
58. folder Drivers containing the installer 3 Start the installer by double clicking its icon Figure 193 p 176 7 3 Preparing the USB Network Connection on a Computer Qu nancRaider ZH 103386000000 E Drivers Seorch Drive Organize E Open ay Goh a y Libraries a Computer amp Local Disk C y 4 8 nancRaider ZH 103386000000 Es de Drivers la Network FLIR RNDIS Setup exe FUR EMDIS Setup exe Date modified 2012 01 31 14 35 Date created 2012 01 31 1434 Application Se 381 MB Figure 193 FLIR RNDIS driver installer j User Account Control f Do you want to allow the following program to make NV changes to this computer p Program name Setup Application AS Verified publisher FLIR Radiation File origin Hard drive on this computer vo Show details Figure 194 Installation warning 4 You will be asked whether you want to allow the installation of software Figure 194 p 176 Please click Yes 5 Follow the instructions given on screen Figure 195 p 177 Em If a FLIR RNDIS driver is already installed on your PC you will be guided through the deinstallation before the installation begins The installation will finish in a few moments Figure 196 p 177 6 Stop the mass storage connection from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer see 7 2 p 170 Whenever you connect a computer and a FLIR identiFINDER R300 which is not in the USB mas
59. for units according to the Syst me International d Unit s International System of Units Prefix Symbol Decimal 1074 yotta Y 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 1071 zetta Z 1000 000 000 000 000 000 000 1018 exa E 1000 000 000 000 000 000 1015 peta P 1000 000 000 000 000 1014 tera T 1 000 000 000 000 10 giga G 1000000000 10 mega M 1 000 000 10 kilo k 1 000 102 hecto h 100 101 deca da 10 10 1 10 deci d 0 1 107 centi C 0 01 10 milli m 0 001 107 micro u 0 000 001 107 nano n 0 000 000 001 107 pico p 0 000 000 000 001 10715 femto f 0 000 000 000 000 001 10719 atto a 0 000 000 000 000 000 001 10721 zepto Z 0 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 10774 yocto y 0 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 Also known as Metric Prefixes SI Prefixes D Glossary Units of Time The SI base unit for time is the second It may be prefixed with the usual SI Unit Prefixes to express smaller or larger quantities Units known from everyday life Table 5 p 288 are often used for larger quantities Table 5 Units of time Unit Symbol Relation Second sec s Minute min m 60 sec Hour h 60 min Day d 24h Year a 365 25 d The Year is often prefixed see Table 4 p 287 to express very large quantities like 1 3 Ga for 1 3 billion years the Half Life of 9K Universal Serial Bus USB URI Uniform Resource Identifier USB Universal Serial Bus A specification to establish communication between various types of d
60. functions You get the next item in the list with E mapped to Our example is about the display language so let s use 3 to change to for example Deutsch Ger man Figure 20 p 39 BR identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 m Settings 17 Mar 14 19 YE Display Backlight 10 a Timeout 15s Language Changed Value Key Functions Normal eS a Figure 20 Changing Values Changed entry field Reveal More Commands The actual setting did not change yet the screen is still displayed in English You can choose other values with O ad lib To make your changes effective you need another command which is currently inaccessible Press mapped to 0 to make it visible Figure 21 p 39 WU Settings 17 Mar 14 58 Display Backlight 10 Timeout 15s Language ilh bal Changed Value Reveal More Commands Figure 21 Changing Values Revealing more commands The moment you press mapped to Q the new setting takes effect In our case the screen is displayed in German Figure 22 p 40 The keys functions return to their previous state In case you change your mind you can editing the value with Q Reveal the command with 9399 if necessary The value in effect before you started editing with 44 will be reestab lished identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN E 2 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys L Einstellun
61. includ ing for example applications provided by public institutions such as Cambio and GADRAS Sandia National Laboratories USA http www sandia gov or PeakEasy Los Alamos National Laboratory USA http www lanl gov Also known as N42 Army Time 7 24 Hour Clock Astronomical Time 724 Hour Clock Atom The basic unit of matter consisting of a Nucleus surrounded by a cloud of Electrons Atomic Mass The mass of a specific Isotope sum of the masses of all Protons Neutrons Mass Num ber and Electrons Atomic Mass Number Mass Number Atomic Number Z The number of Protons in the Nucleus of an Atom Also known as Proton Number p Particle Beta Particle p Radiation Beta Radiation D Glossary Background Radiation The ubiquitous radiation in the environment emitted from a variety of mostly natural and a few man made sources Natural sources are terrestrial Decay of Radionuclides like 23 U or Th abundant in the Earth crust or cosmic high energy 7Protons originating primar ily from the Sun interact with the upper Earth atmosphere creating a shower of secondary radiation Becquerel Bq The becquerel is the SI derived unit of radioactivity One Bq is defined as the Activity of a quantity of radioactive material in which one Nucleus decays per second Curie 1 Bq 17 Beta Particle High energy high speed Electrons 67 or Positrons B emitted
62. intervals or in response to a dose rate warning You can switch this mode on or off and specify the interval see 6 20 p 135 For each measurement data will be collected until an instrument specific number of gamma counts has been registered cf Dynamic identification duration see 6 4 p 116 AN In low radiation environments this can take quite a while even longer than the interval you specified The next scheduled measurement will be omitted in such cases The start of an automated measurement will be announced 60 s in advance by a countdown shown instead of the current time on the display of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 97 p 94 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN 4 4 Automated Mode IT ENT L E ountdown Dose Rate ii A 9 39 uSv h 0 017 cps Neutrons Figure 97 Countdown announcing the start of a scheduled measurement Automatic identification measurements override other activities except alarms see 5 p 97 Au tomatic measurements are blocked during e Background measurements in Finder Mode see 4 2 p 88 e Arunning self test see 6 19 p 134 During these conditions the countdown continues but Blocked is shown instead of the count down timer Should the condition end before the scheduled time the measurement starts Other wise the measurement is omitted and a new attempt is made after the regular interval During the measurement ba
63. location and clock settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 GPS This web page section Figure 203 p 187 lets you inspect and edit GPS settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 settings p 180 GPS and Clock p 186 gt GPS gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt General Options p 104 gt GPS Settings p 127 gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Maintenance p 104 gt Show Status p 130 Switch the GPS receiver On or Off If the GPS receiver is on and the reception is good enough the GPS coordinates of the current location are stored with measurement results If the GPS reception is not good enough for example inside buildings the current loca tion cannot be determined If a location could be determined from GPS data since you switched on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 the last valid location is used Otherwise the position of the intersection of the Greenwich Meridian with the Equator is used 0 N 0 E Additionally the clock of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is set according to the high precision time received from the GPS satellites Transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 GPS Coordinates The current location of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 if GPS is on and receives satellite data 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings i Data L
64. not fissile itself but can be used to generate the fissile element U 232Th is used in gas lantern mantles and WIG welding rods The spec tra of Th and U are very similar 2321 oy 232 Th Y Special nuclear material The spectra of 3 Th and U are very similar T Special nuclear material Used in nuclear power generators Although the United States demonstrated detonated in 1955 a 3U based bomb core the use of 233U within a weapon is not as viable of a choice for a weapon when compared to U Q5 Special nuclear material Can be effectively used to manufacture a nuclear fission weapon and is a primary concern because the design complexity required is far less than that required for a Pu based weapon Gi Special nuclear material Used as a base material for generating Pu 1 Special nuclear material A mixture of 38U and 2 U in various concentrations from depleted to highly enriched 2 U Can be effectively used to manufacture a nu clear fission weapon and is a primary concern because the design complexity required is far less than that required for a Pu based weapon C Medically used material 133Xe is used for blood flow measurements and to image the heart lungs and brain for example by means of tomography D Glossary Appendix D Glossary This glossary lists terms units and abbreviations used throughout this document and provides a brief explanation For detailed informati
65. or 42Kr and 4Se Isomer An excited state in a Nucleus having a very long Half Life compared to other excited states at least a us or ms Some isomers expose a much longer half life so they are called metastable m for example Tc with a half life of about 6 h D Glossary Isotone Different Nuclides having the same number of Neutrons for example 155 SAr E and T0Ca with 20 neutrons each but a different Atomic Number Isotope Different Nuclides having the same number of Protons also known as Atomic Number belonging to the same chemical Element for example 35U 233U and 38U J Joule Joule J The SI derived unit of energy 7Electron Volt It is the energy required to apply a force of one newton through a distance of one meter 1 N m or the work required to produce one watt of power for one second 1 W s kg m 1jJ 1N m 1 m 1W s 52 KCl Potassium Chloride LaBr Lanthanum Bromide Lanthanum Bromide LaBr Substance to build Scintillation Counters LED Light Emitting Diode LED Stabilization Method to adjust for the drift of a Photo Multiplier Tube by measuring the light of a known reference LED Linearization Measurements relying on Scintillation require ways to transfer and amplify light This is typically done by using a crystal mounted to a Photo Multiplier Tube Unfortunately the physics of this assembly introduces a non proportionality betw
66. p 37 for details O aD Edit composite values see 2 2 4 p 40 for details Return to the superior menu 6 34 Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds gt Options Menu p 103 Alarm Options p 105 Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds LN settings p 180 Alarm p 188 gt Gamma Alarms p 189 This screen Figure 176 p 163 groups the thresholds for dose rate alarms and warnings Specify the thresholds by setting a value with a unit The base unit Sv h or rem h available here reflects your preferences see 6 31 p 159 You can specify values between 1 nSv h and 1 Sv h 100 nrem h to 100 rem h For meaningful alerts specify an alarm threshold above the warning threshold Settings and Commands Alarm The value with unit for the alarm threshold Use Off the lowest value to suppress this alarm Available units are nSv h uSv h mSv h Sv h nrem h urem h mrem h rem h 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference 110 Settings 22 Mar 17 10 Dose Rate Thresholds Alarm 10 0mSv h Warning 7 0uSv h o Alarm 3 00 Figure 176 Dose rate alarm threshold settings The value with unit for the warning threshold Use Off the lowest value to suppress this alarm Available units are nSv h uSv h mSv h Sv h nrem h urem h mrem h rem h The sensitivity of the detection of unusual gamma radiation increases see 5 3 p 101 You can specify Off to suppress the notific
67. should not present any hazard to the operator The housing is essential to the integrity and safe operation of the instrument Under no cir cumstances should the housing be tampered with penetrated or otherwise removed except for normal access to the external connectors see chapter 7 p 167 and 11 p 229 CQ The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is not certified for use in explosive environments A The power adapter is connected to line power Normal care in handling such a line power device should be exercised In particular this unit should not be connected to line power if it is wet The nature of the application is such that objects being surveyed with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 could emit radioactive radiation with hazardous intensity 1 3 Before First Use LS We recommend charging the batteries of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 after unpacking 11 2 p 230 prior to first time use Thisisa good time to get familiar with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 by reading this manual Please read at least the rest of this chapter and those on basic operation chapters 2 p 27 and 3 p 69 before starting to experiment with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Chapter 2 p 27 explains the principles of operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to get you pre pared for a typical survey you will be guided through in chapter 3 p 69 The fundamental modes of operation of the FLIR identiF NDER R300 are detailed in chapter 4 p 85 followed by explanat
68. the XML portion of the message The message is then terminated with the NUL character at the end of line 5 This is not part of the XML specification but is required by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a message delimiter A 6 6 General Error Format Error messages sent from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will be of the following general format Listing A 3 General Error Format e eners ion CNN je gt lib ee A Info Pool Error name CommandName type nanoRaider id SerialNumber See pw bom es dae EN Line 1 XML Declaration The XML declaration is the same for all messages Line 2 Error element The message will will contain one Error element as the root element name An error message will contain the same CommandName present in the command message it is in response to This is true even if the CommandName was invalid This may also be unknown if the FLIR identiFINDER R300 was unable to parse a command element from the XML message type The type attribute indicates the device class sending the message For the FLIR identiFINDER R300 this will be nanoRaider description The description attribute shown in the example with the ErrorDescription place holder will contain a brief textual description of the error condition and or cause The following are examples of some actual error descriptions Unknown command Malformed XML message received spectra id 416 does not exist A SPP Commands and Upda
69. the bottom of the screen with mapped to the 0 key the entire menu is moved up to bring the following items into view The position markers are adjusted appropriately I Connectivity Options 17 Mar 12 56 Scroll Bar A E Scroll Bar Position Marker 4 Chosen Item Mass Storage E Position Marker More Items Available Choose Items with Down Down Figure 17 Choosing from a menu Scrolling in long menus 2 2 3 Changing Values Many settings of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 require you to choose from a list of options identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys The operations are illustrated using the Display Settings as an example Like in a menu 2 2 2 p 35 you choose the setting you want to change with Figure 18 p 38 I Settings 17 Mar 13 18 Display Backlight 10 a Timeout 15s Chosen Item Language English Down Key Descriptions Figure 18 Changing Values Choosing the setting Once the desired setting is chosen you it with Q Therendering ofthe entry field changes Figure 19 p 38 a different color and two arrows indicate there is a list of values you can choose from 1 Settings 17 Mar 13 37 E Display Backlight 10 a Timeout 15s Language h bal Selected Entry Field Reveal More Commands Key Descriptions Figure 19 Changing Values Selected entry field Note that the keys now have other
70. the installation begins 5 You might get asked whether to install this software Figure 186 p 172 Please click Continue Anyway The installation will finish in a few moments Figure 187 p 173 7 3 Preparing the USB Network Connection on a Computer FLIR USB RNDIS Driver Setup Welcome Welcome to the installer for the FLIR USB RNDIS Driver 1 0 It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before continuing with this installation If you have any other programs running please click Cancel close the programs and run this setup again Otherwise please click Install to proceed with the installation Figure 185 Beginning of the installation Software Installation The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo m to aoe its x a with Windows XP Tell me why recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation Figure 186 Installation warning 6 Stop the mass storage connection from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer see 7 2 p 170 Whenever you connect a computer and a FLIR identiFINDER R300 which is not in the USB mass storage mode the FLIR identiFINDER R300 identifies itself as an RNDIS device A computer running Microsoft Windows XP detecting the device checks whether the device is known and will report the detection of new ha
71. to monitor medical waste or scrap metal you name it It will detect and identify radioactive materials If the type or quantity of radioactive material exceeds pre set alarm levels then this information will be provided to you In particular the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will identify threat objects A threat object is defined as radioactive material whose signature is consistent with that of material that could be used for terrorist purposes Threat materials are usually those used in a nuclear explosive device or which could be used in Radiological Dispersive Devices Dirty bombs The FLIR identiFINDER R300 incorporates advanced physics algorithms that allow any user to make highly sophisticated scientific measurements The two button interface and simple menu structure were designed so that it can be operated with minimal training The high degree of au tomation allows for successful operation even in distracting and hostile environments The instru ment is very robust and stable even in the most demanding conditions and can be operated suc cessfully with only a few buttons Outstanding features are e Large Cadmium Zinc Telluride CZT detector for fast and accurate identification Brilliant color display with 320x240 pixels that is easy to read in all lighting conditions Large database capacity for more than half a million spectra or other data e GPS receiver to log incident locations e Wired communication via standard USB inter
72. to scale identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 A Info Pool A 4 Unmanned Neutron Detection AN For unmanned measurements involving un moderated neutron sources a 30 cm x 30cm x 15 cm PMMA phantom Figure 240 p 243 or equivalent must be placed between the source and the detector in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 238 p 241 in order to provide ad equate moderation of fast neutrons and to simulate field operation instructions in section 3052 D T Figure 240 Recommended setup for unmanned measurements of fast neutrons FLIR Detection A 5 Certificates A 5 1 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Manufacturer s declaration of conformity CE FLIR Radiation GmbH Piepersberg 12 D 42653 Solingen T 49 212 222090 F 49 212 201045 FLIR Extraordinary Protection e EC Declaration of Conformity According to 57 of EMVG of 15 Dez 2004 and EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Herewith we declare that the above mentioned device complies with the following EC Directives including changes and implementation into national law EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Furthermore the following harmonized European standards are exercised DIN EN 61326 a complete listing is included in the technical documentation The mentioned device is defined for analyzing of gamma radiation J EE Date Ralf Lentering Director of Engineering October 18 2011 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 A Info Pool
73. to source Figure 86 While Finder mode is disabled cycling modes will toggle between Dose Rate and Identification modes 4 1 Dose Rate Mode The Dose Rate Mode is the basic operation mode of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 It is activated after starting up the instrument mp X 18 Mar 09 40 2 Current Dose Rate Dose Rate Alarm Threshold i 3 Q uSv h Dose Rate Unit 0 017 cps Neutrons Current Dose Rate Current Neutron Rate Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Figure 87 Dose Rate mode E identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 4 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes For best dose rate calculations the source must not be too close to the instrument Figure 239 p 242 The dose rate display Figure 87 p 86 shows two representations of the gamma dose rate Analog A colored horizontal bar along a logarithmic axis ranging from 0 001 uSv h to 10 Sv h 1Sv 100 rem across the upper part of the screen A vertical line marks the position of dose rate alarm threshold see 6 33 p 161 for setting the threshold If the dose rate rises above the threshold the color of the bar representing the current dose rate changes Digital Large digits and a dose rate unit in the screen s center The unit is adjusted to the order of magnitude of the dose rate uSv h mSv h Sv h and reflects your preferences see 6 31 p 159 4 If your variant is eq
74. when selecting the offset Transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Current Time The current time of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and your computer Set Instrument Clock to Computer Time If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 does not get the current time via GPS you can set the internal clock by setting it to the current time of your computer 85 Alarm Web Page settings p 180 Alarm This web page Figure 204 p 189 provides access to alarm settings ofthe FLIR identiFINDER R300 for inspection or editing To transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 click Save 8 5 1 Alarm Indicators EL Settings p 180 Alarm p 188 gt Alarm Indicators This web page section Figure 204 p 189 lets you switch the alarm indicators of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 on or off You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under gt Options Menu p 103 gt Alarm Options p 105 gt Alarm Indicators p 160 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Alarm Alarm Indicators see z Gamma Alarms Dose Alarm Dose Warning Dose Rate Alarm Dose Rate Warning o Alarm Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Neutron Alarms Ala
75. your palm It is part of the FLIR Detection family of instruments designed to provide critical ca pabilities required in a wide range of mission circumstances Such capabilities include e Search for sources of gamma radiation or scan areas contaminated with gamma radionuclides e Automatic identification of radionuclides by analysis of gamma ray spectra e Gamma dose and dose rate measurements e Neutron detection with count rate and accumulated counts Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector e Semi conductor detector for improved resolution and ruggedness The FLIR identiFINDER R300 combines the capabilities of a Personal Radiation Detector PRD with the radionuclide identification capabilities of a Radio Isotope Identification Detector RIID into one conveniently small package The FLIR identiFINDER R300 utilizes the same reliable advanced technology that is deployed in the well known identiFINDER 2 family of instruments We offer a family of handheld products to address the various applications operators will encounter while ensuring operators will be presented with the same screens information and operation between all our devices 1 5 Unpacking and Identifying Accessories The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is designed for the survey of objects ranging from small packages to large objects such as freight containers to search for illicit trafficking of radioactive material to scan containers for radiation leaks
76. 0 Initialization mp TI 17 Mar 11 04 2 Dose Rate A 0 055 0 000 cps Neutrons Figure 56 FLIR identiFINDER R300 after powering up identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN 2 6 Shutting Down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 26 Shutting Down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Several methods are available to shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 To shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 normally 1 Press and hold After a couple of seconds the shut down screen will be displayed Figure 57 p 64 10 Shut Down 17 Mar 16 51 Shut Down Do you want to shut down Figure 57 Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 Press to confirm the shut down command or Keep O depressed and the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will shut down or Press Q to cancel the shut down and resume normal operation A Ifyou shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 while an alarm is raised Figure 58 p 65 the end time of the alarm entry is not stored in the database 5 p 97 Instead the end time will reflect that the instrument was shut down before the end of the alarm gt To shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 in case of software failure 1 Press and hold O for about 20 seconds until the red LED and the beeper emit six short and one long signal The FLIR identiFINDER R300 should shut down 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 jim 24 Mar 10 24 S amp 11 Shut Down Caution There are
77. 00 37000 37000 3700 37000 37000 37000 37000 37000 37000 37000 0 081 0 121 0 963 0 662 0 511 0 835 0 122 1 173 0 662 0 511 0 081 0 121 0 963 0 662 0 511 0 835 0 122 1 173 0 088 0 081 0 121 0 963 0 662 0 511 0 835 0 122 1 173 0 088 0 081 0 121 0 963 0 276 0 244 1 082 1 275 0 136 1 333 1 115 0 276 0 244 1 082 1 275 0 136 1 333 0 276 0 244 1 082 1 275 0 136 1 333 0 276 0 244 1 082 0 303 0 356 0 384 0 344 0 562 0 826 1 109 1 408 0 303 0 356 0 384 0 344 0 562 0 826 1 109 1 408 0 303 0 356 0 384 0 344 0 562 0 826 1 109 1 408 0 303 0 356 0 384 0 344 0 562 0 826 1 109 1 408 FLIR Detection continuation l CIID ler CIA p D D AM S FLIN IUCITUTIINDEDn NJIVU Nudide Activity Bq Peaks of Interest MeV 137 Cs 22Na 54Mn 27 Co 60Co 109Cd DD N A AH A t Ro N OO N A AK D 3700 37000 37000 37000 37000 37000 0 662 0 511 1 275 0 835 0 122 0 136 1 173 1 333 0 088 0 303 0 356 0 384 0 344 0 562 0 826 1 109 1 408 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 a A 1 Several variants of this product are available A identiFINDER R 300 nanoRaider Z Cadmium zinc telluride CdZnTe detector identiFINDER R 300 nanoRaider ZH identiFINDER R 300 Specifications A Info Pool Appendix A Info Pool Cadmium zinc telluride CdZnTe detector He tube Specifications r
78. 00 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection 10 Connecting via Satellite Phone 223 10 1 Pairing the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Satellite Phone 223 10 2 Configuring Remote Server Settings for the Satellite Phone 227 11 Powering the FLIR identiFINDER R300 229 11 1 External Power Sources 4064030 4 ed 3 3 43 3 3 3 3 3 3o x x x x x ok oko ox Rx 229 11 1 1 Wall Mounted Power Supply lere 230 112 Charging the FLIR identiFINDER R300 4s RR Rx uxo xx o3 3 8 8 8 ks 230 DIXI Chareime DEDOS uomo ee aa a be be pde dd ded 231 11 3 Battery Power Saving LIDS 5 oecorwvrrrrcrrros EA 231 12 Accessories for the FLIR identiFINDER R300 233 Buk a EORR 97 59 9535333339393 3 3 9 8 3 9 mi RN E x eee ee 233 Appendix 235 A Info Pool 237 Ad identiFINDER R 300 Specifications 6 aooaa es 237 Ad Delor oson 000020000 aa a E A A HS 241 AS Optimum Illumination of Detector Crystals o o2moncoonom ooooooros 242 A4 Unmanned Neutron Detection no a soaa e e ea e e e a ee 243 AS COUN IEEE 244 A 5 1 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Manufacturer s declaration of conformity CE 244 A 6 Bluetooth Serial Port Profile SPP Communication Overview 245 A 6 1 Bluetooth Device Name and PIN o 245 A 6 2 PAPO anar a REA AA 245 A 6 3 Conventions and Usage Notes 222 225 2 4 mor o xo Ry ok Read 245 A 6 4 General Command ForMat e e 246 A 6 5 General U
79. 00 or when you reset them explicitly see below E The counter for dose keeps accumulating data until you explicitly reset it see below identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 re 6 29 Gamma Neutron Counters TIT Counters 22 Mar 14 Gamma Gamma Counts 12154 Counting Duration 233 s Gamma Dose 70 12 pSv Dose Duration 67 d Figure 170 Gamma counter information LLLI Counters 22 Mar 14 59 EAE Gamma Neutrons Gamma Counts 12154 Counting Duration 233 s Gamma Dose 70 12 p Sv Dose Duration 67 d Neutrons O Neutron rate 0 000 cps Exit Figure 171 Gamma and neutron counter information Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Settings and Commands Gamma Counts The accumulated gamma counts registered by the detector crystals Counting Duration The time frame in seconds in which the neutrons shown at the bottom and gamma counts shown above were measured Gamma Dose The accumulated gamma dose You can specify the unit used for display see 6 31 p 159 Dose Duration The time span in seconds in which the gamma dose shown above was measured BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference Neutrons The accumulated neutron counts Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Neutron Rate The current neutron rate in counts per second Available only for variants equipped with a neut
80. 1 ready when contacting our customer support FLIR Detection has service centers throughout the world To locate your local service center please refer to the website detectionsupport com radiation FLIR Detection Inc 100 Midland Road Oak Ridge TN 37830 USA z 1 865 220 8700 da 1 865 220 7181 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 C Nuclide Library Appendix C Nuclide Library The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can identify and report some special radiation sources and a number of radionuclides as listed in this appendix The usage and severity association given in the table represents the factory defaults You can adapt the association of nuclides with usage 6 6 p 119 and severity 6 7 p 120 to your particular demands The table is sorted by element names and lists the following properties of radiation sources e Nuclide name in standard notation e Nuclide name in simplified notation e Half life e Severity O Innocent A Suspicious C gt Threatening e Usage NORM Naturally occurring radioactive material MED Medically used material IND Industrially used material SNM Special nuclear material NUC Former name for SNM e Remarks on occurrence or application C Nuclide Library Annihilation Background Neutrons Unknown Americium 241 g Am Am 241 433a Annihilation Radiation O Industrially used material Annihilation radiation is released by the electron pos
81. 125 see 6 11 p 127 Maintenance Change Password 128 LA 130 LL DES 133 134 134 SN PARAR see 6 20 p 135 see 6 21 p 137 see 6 22 p 140 see 6 23 3 p 144 see 6 24 p 149 see 6 25 p 150 see 6 26 p 152 see 6 27 p 153 see 6 28 p 154 see 6 29 p 155 see 6 30 p 157 see 6 31 p 159 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 rr a Alarm Options see 6 32 p 160 see 6 33 p 161 see 6 34 p 162 see 6 35 p 163 see 6 36 p 165 Legend Menu all variants Identification Options Change Password Menu some variants Bluetooth SPP General Options Advanced Options Data Logging Connectivity Options Erase Data Send Data Alarm Options Figure 107 Hierarchy of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 menu 6 2 Spectrum 6 2 Spectrum e Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Spectrum E Live Spectrum p 209 This command displays a spectrum and offers access to the settings that influence the display You can acquire data ad hoc or load saved spectra from the database and inspect them with different scalings Otart Coordinate of Horizontal Axis End Coordinate of Horizontal Axis Count Axis Chart Settings Chart Channel or Energy Axis RT 171 8s DT 0 696 Current Dose Rate Spectrum Information Independent
82. 145 Stop 95 107 108 157 211 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 Switch Off 95 System 130 Th 232 116 U 235 116 Up 119 121 Ymax 2 114 Ymax 4 114 Zoom 1 5 MeV 110 Zoom 1 1 110 Zoom 3 MeV 110 Zoom ROI 110 Key Functions setting 124 L L key function 47 LaBr3 278 Language setting 124 Lanthanum Bromide LaBr 278 Latitude property 132 LED 278 LED Stabilization 278 LEDs setting 160 Left key function 35 41 43 127 150 154 162 163 Linear key function 114 Linearization 278 Live Screen web page 180 Live Spectrum web page 181 Live Time LT 278 Live Time setting 122 Load key function 112 Local Area Network web section 180 Local Maximum 278 Location 29 30 Logarithmic key function 114 Longitude property 132 Low Self Discharge Nickel Metal Hydride LSD NiMH 279 INDEX LSD NiMH 279 LT 279 LT key function 114 M M key function 47 MAC Address 279 Main Menu menu 103 Maintenance menu 104 Mark Channel key function 109 Mass Number A 279 Mass Storage command 104 150 MCS 279 Measurement web section 180 Measurements property 136 Media Access Control Address MAC Address 279 Menus Advanced Options 104 Alarm Options 105 Bluetooth SPP 104 Change Password 104 Connectivity Options 104 Data Logging 104 Erase Data 104 General Options 104 Identification Options 103 Main Menu 103 Maint
83. 2014 4 Available Memory 95 Figure 63 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 General system status 3 Verify if there is enough energy in the battery and available space in the memory Figure 63 p 70 4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 switches to the dose rate display Figure 64 p 71 and is ready for operation 3 2 Observing the Environment The Dose Rate Mode Figure 64 p 71 is the basic operation mode of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 please refer to 4 1 p 86 for a detailed description 3 2 1 Gamma Radiation Survey 3 Field Operating Guide 1 j TT Rata mj N r A m TL 7 OL 16 04 Current Dose Rate De se Rate Aare Threshold Logarithmic Scale 5 B 9 D USV h E Dose Rate Unit 0 017 cps Neutrons Figure 64 Dose Rate mode Current Dose Rate Current Neutron Rate Available only for variante equipped with a neutron detector gt To survey for gamma radiation 1 Move the instrument around e g Figure 65 p 72 and observe the display Figure 64 p 71 The current dose rate is shown in large digits and as a bar chart For best dose rate calculations the source must not be too close to the instrument Fig ure 239 p 242 Oe You can change the dose rate unit see 6 31 p 159 and the alarm thresholds see 6 33 p 161 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 continuously compares the radiation to warning and alarm thresh olds see 6 33 p 161 Should the radiation e
84. 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Data i Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Resources Open Source Software D3 is provided under the MIT license jQuery is provided under the MIT license jQuery Custom File Input is provided under the MIT license jQuery Form Plugin is provided under the MIT license jQuery Mobile is provided under the MIT license jQuery Ul is provided under the MIT license Knockout is provided under the MIT license Modernizr is provided under the MIT license SignalR is provided under the MIT license TAR Library source code package DotNetZip is provided under the MS PL license Data Schemata ANSI N42 42 2006 schema ANSI N42 42 2012 schema ANSI N42 42 2006 extensions schema ANSI N42 42 2012 extensions schema 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 201 Resources web page 2 Download Download the license or the source code of a library from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer Data Schemata This section Figure 201 p 183 offers the XML schemata describing the xml files you can download or send from your FLIR identiFINDER R300 ES Home p 179 gt Resources p 182 gt Data Schemata The schemata help you to interpret the files and to develop your own software for further processing the files identiFINDER R 8 3 General Web Page
85. 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference Chapter 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s vast number of set tings that influence its behavior and the commands for expert analyses and advanced operations You can access these commands and settings by navigating the menu hierarchy Depending on your variant there are different entry points for the menu hierarchy Some FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants provide easy access to a few commands and settings with out password The complete menu listed under 6 1 p 103 is available as well Main Menu Em umen HR IHHH IIR see 6 1 p 103 00 gm see 6 10 p 125 RRR see 6 36 p 165 ENS cece crete rere nmemmmmemmm nmm mmm see 6 1 p 104 6 1 Complete Option Menus Outline All FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants provide access to the complete set of commands and settings Usually you have to enter a password see 2 2 7 p 46 before access Options Menu More Options _ E see 6 2 p 106 ccc ete eet eee GHI S see 6 3 p 115 Identification Options Identification Settings eccccccccmmmmmBB see 6 4 p 116 RRR see 6 5 p 118 00 a see 6 6 p 119 ee ee er er eee eee ee eee see 6 7 p 120 FLIR Detection see 6 8 p 121 see 6 23 1 p 141 see 6 23 2 p 142 Advanced Options General Options see 6 9 p 122 see 6 10 p
86. 25 Detected SD1000 device entry chosen 4 monas 225 Selecting a PIN for the pairing of Bluetooth deviceS 0 o ee aes 226 Bluetooth Periphery Information Pairing isin progress 226 Pairing to a Bluetooth device failed a 226 The Device Details indicates successfull pairing 227 Power Supply Removingtheinternationaladapter ss 230 Power Supply Attaching an international adapter 230 Source set sold separately sess e mom mom AA dd wee d 233 Position of the detector centers ofthe FLIR identiFINDERR300 241 Optimal dose rate calculation needs a uniform illumination of the three detector crys tals for which the source to detector distance should be at least 15 cm 6 in drawn to Belg rro ass 242 Recommended setup for unmanned measurements of fastneutrons 243 After uploading a software package 52525229 9993 IGIGISGe cRo 33 8 amp o OE OH 256 Full width at half maximum height ofa peak llle 274 Ionizing radiation warning symbol ISO 21482 llle 277 Multi Channel Scaling sario nao here BA 280 FLIR Detection BEC identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 1 Welcome Chapter 1 Welcome This chapter offers introductory information about this manual some important advice for your safety and that of the instrument and a general overview of the
87. 4 133 Erase All Screenshots command 104 134 Erase All Spectra command 104 133 Erase Data menu 104 eV 273 Exit key function 36 73 91 93 95 108 113 116 118 122 125 127 128 132 134 137 139 142 143 145 149 150 152 155 157 159 165 227 Extensible Markup Language 273 Extra Duration setting 117 F False Alarm 273 False Alarm Rate FAR 273 FAR 273 Fast Neutron 273 FGPu 273 File Types n42 154 202 204 spc 154 202 204 Spe 154 202 204 xml 183 195 Zip 56 197 198 202 203 Finder key function 73 75 88 Finder Mode 88 232 Finder Settings command 104 157 Fission 273 Fuel Grade Plutonium FGPu 273 Full Width at Half Maximum FWHM 273 Fusion 273 FWHM 274 G y Radiation 274 Gamma Alarms web section 180 Gamma Count property 106 Gamma Counts property 156 Gamma Dose property 156 Gamma Radiation 274 Gamma Ray Detection 274 Gamma Neutron Counters command 104 155 Ge 274 Geiger M ller Tube GM Tube 274 General web page 180 General Options menu 104 Germanium Ge 275 Global Positioning System GPS 275 GM Tube 275 GMT 275 GPS 29 30 125 232 275 GPS key function 130 GPS property 131 GPS setting 128 GPS web section 180 GPS and Clock web page 180 GPS Settings command 104 127 Gray Gy 275 Greenwich Mean Time GMT 275 Gy 275 H Half Life 275 HAZMAT H
88. 45 157 Searching for Bluetooth devic s on ew wo om ddd 3 3 9 dE ESS EES AA 146 150 No devices deteci d xus uis ie lm mode ie e EUER EORR 36396 ERAN s d 146 159 Listofsmtable Bluetooth devices detected osos osos me xe ww a eee wee 147 160 Selecting a PIN for the pairing of Bluetoothdevices 147 161 Pairing with a Bluetooth device ern 148 162 Paired toa Bluetooth device amp a x amp ooo om ome ete c crc en m m da m 148 163 Pairing to a Bluetooth device failed ios rr 149 164 Upper items of the remote server settings o o oocorscnrasas 4244 444 149 165 Starting the USB mass storage mode aaoo a a REDE R HH 151 166 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 in USB mass storage mode 151 167 Network Cos s p sa maaa aaa 157919 a 152 168 Report settings a uu uode db db oho RR RS A S s peo x 154 169 Download settings eee nnn 155 170 Gamma counter information i mo 55 9 x o9 com ox om x xoxo x Soo i 156 171 Gamma and neutron counter information Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detecti 2203533 3 2 2 5 2 2 9 oe eee eRe RRR ARA 156 I IIBBBISEEDRDS 033m 55 5959595599 5939 4185 89149 5 5 2 9 9 157 173 Wee le ees 2 333333 99999935454945939925049023523984 43934 159 174 Alarm indication settings ke kaka eee yy rr ARA 160 175 Dose alarm threshold settings o nonoo A 161 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 List of Figures FLIR Detection
89. 50s 17346 cps Move away from source if possible Figure 93 Identification Mode Count rate too high for best results Advice The acquisition of data stops after the duration or count criterion 6 4 p 116 is met or when you EN The FLIR identiFINDER R300 applies the identification algorithm and saves and displays the result Figure 95 p 92 and Figure 96 p 93 If nuclides were identified the results are saved The reference number of the saved record is shown so you can refer to it for further processing You can specify whether confidence usage or severity are shown see 6 4 p 116 Em Nuclides the identification algorithm did not recognize or those recognized but having their visibility suppressed see 6 5 p 118 are reported as Unknown Settings and Commands Dose Switch to Dose Rate mode see 4 1 p 86 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tt 4 3 Identification Mode mug identification 18 Mar 12 57 M 0 _ Pol n ource Schematic Count Rate Current Dose Rate 20 0 HSV h Q 9 D Dead Time Relative to Passed Duration Duration J 24 gt 1 6 CAPS Current Count Rate 36 3 9 O Registered Counts Best Range Current Count Rate Figure 94 Identification Mode Progress display during count limited data acquisition mug identification 18 Mar 13 14 YE Nuclides Insufficient counts Reference Number of the S
90. 9 14 System Serial Number 103156000000 Available Memory 95 Screenshots 12 IP Address 172 16 0 1 Software 2014 4 Figure 138 FLIR identiFINDER R300 status display System Software The version of the software GPS Your current location determined from the GPS data received by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 139 p 131 III Status Information 22 Mar 09 50 r GPS Satelites 7 Latitude 51 12 40 N Longitude 79 3 59 E Sea Level Altitude 228 m Figure 139 FLIR identiFINDER R300 status display GPS Ld The GPS status data are shown only if the GPS receiver is switched on see 6 11 p 127 Satellites The number of satellites currently visible to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The more satellites the better the precision of the location data A If this number drops below 3 the given location is invalid It is either the most re cent valid location or if there was no valid location since you switched on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 the intersection of the Greenwich meridian and the equator identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tt 6 15 Reset Factory Settings Latitude The current location north or south of the equator given in angle degrees minutes and seconds Longitude The current location west or east of the prime meridian passing through the Royal Ob servatory in Greenwich UK given in angle degrees minutes and seconds Altitude The current altitude i
91. 9 9 9 RR R 02 81 Ready to search for Bluetooth devices o o es 83 82 List of suitable Bluetooth devices detected 0 o ee 0 83 83 Pairing with a Bluetooth device oko osos hob ob op bob cb dom xe xm 9e 9e mex m oo dod on 93 84 Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 uu uu zoo os pone eurem 3 x x x xt xt 94 85 Cycling the manual modes Dose Rate Finder and Identification 86 86 While Finder mode is disabled cycling modes will toggle between Dose Rate and Iden tification modes accesos 86 87 Dose Rate mode xicos rss 86 25 Weer led cece eer see ee Ree DERE AAA 87 89 Finder mode Initial background measurement lll 0 89 90 Finder mode Continuous measurement eren 89 91 Identification Mode Progress display during time limited data acquisition 90 92 Identification Mode Count rate too low for best results 91 93 Identification Mode Count rate too high for best resultS 91 94 Identification Mode Progress display during count limited data acquisition 92 95 Identification Mode Identification was not possible o 92 96 Identification Mode Identified radionuclides 93 97 Countdown announcing the start of a scheduled measurement 94 98 Automated measurement 2222222 ooo roer 94 99 Message during remote controlled spectrum acquis
92. A 6 Bluetooth Serial Port Profile SPP Communication Overview While the FLIR identiFINDER R300 has Bluetooth Serial Port Profile SPP enabled see 6 23 1 p 141 and is connected to a compatible device it will respond to properly formatted queries and can also stream data This allows integrators to design custom interfaces and for operators to use such interfaces to either listen for or inquire about current instrument status The following is a description of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 SPP data format X The following does not apply to Bluetooth Periphery mode and only applies to Bluetooth SPP mode A 6 1 Bluetooth Device Name and PIN A unique Bluetooth device name for each FLIR identiFINDER R300 is set during manufacture and can be provided upon request Each FLIR identiFINDER R300 will also have a unique PIN see 6 23 1 p 141 made up of 16 characters selected from lower case English alphabet characters a z and numerals 0 9 A 6 2 Data Format The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is capable of responding to commands from a device connected via a Bluetooth SPP connection In addition the FLIR identiFINDER R300 can be configured to stream data in response to an environmental or user trigger The commands and triggers are explained in the following sections A 6 3 Conventions and Usage Notes The format of the commands and responses make up a complete and well formatted XML docu ment including the XML declaration The character encod
93. Changing the selected digit Reveal More Commands You increase the selected digit with E and decrease it with If you increase the selected digit above 9 or decrease it below 0 the surrounding digits are changed appropriately If you want to change the number in larger or smaller increments you can select another digit to be immediateley affected by the o and commands Press until you see the commands or GF and then use them to select the digit you want to change Figure 26 p 42 2 Identification Selected Entry Field Selected Digit Extra Duration 30s Confidence Show Usage Hide Reveal More Commands Previous Digit Figure 26 Changing Numerical Values Selecting digits To get the commands for editing back press until o and eo reappear After you finished editing the number press until you see the command then press Q identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 In case you change your mind you can editing the value with Q Reveal the command with 9399 if necessary The value in effect before you started editing with salsda will be reestab lished Pressing O for a moment also cancels editing A Do not press O for too long That would power down your FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 2 6 Entering Text Several entries consist of arbitrary text for example the operator s name phone numbers or set tings for Bluetooth communication to a rem
94. Connectivity Options 103 Current Alarm State 103 105 165 Display Settings 104 122 Dose Alarm Thresholds 105 161 Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds 105 162 Dose Rate Settings 104 159 Download Settings 104 154 Erase All Alarms 104 133 Erase All Screenshots 104 134 Erase All Spectra 104 133 Finder Settings 104 157 Gamma Neutron Counters 104 155 GPS Settings 104 127 Identification Settings 103 116 Mass Storage 104 150 Network 104 152 Neutron Alarm Thresholds 163 Neutron Alarm Thresholds 105 Nuclide Severity 103 120 Nuclide Usage 103 119 Nuclide Visibility 103 118 Presets 104 121 Remote Server Settings 104 149 Report Settings 104 153 Reset Factory Settings 104 132 Self Test 104 134 Send Identification 137 Send Identification 104 Send Spectrum 140 Send Spectrum 104 Set Password 104 128 Show Status 104 130 Spectrum 103 106 Confidence setting 117 Confirm key function 87 Connection String setting 150 Connection String property 227 Connectivity web page 180 Connectivity Options menu 104 Connectivity Options command 103 CONOPS CONOPs ConOps 271 Continental Time 271 Continue key function 65 76 93 117 Coordinated Universal Time UTC 271 Count 271 Counting Duration property 156 Counts setting 122 INDEX Cs gt LiYCl Ce 271 Cs 137 key function 116 Curie 271 Current Alarm State command 103 105 165 Cur
95. DER R300 password via the web interface type L M or R upper case identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN 2 4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Figure 50 Example printout of measurement results Ed After entering the correct password access is granted until you switch off your FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 6 p 64 2 4 6 Administration Access Special credentials are required to access the administration pages of the web server where you can access system files or upload new software l Username admin The credentials set at the factory are Password admin BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Authentication Please enter the password you use to unlock the device This consists of the three capital letters L M and R Device Password Required 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 51 Entering the password before accessing protected web pages 4r We recommend to change the password for better protection of your instrument against unauthorized access see 8 18 p 215 nanoHalder Settings Data z Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Authentication Credentials User Name admin Log on 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 52 Enteri
96. Dose Rate W i J Fri 021 412 1 5 Dose Rate Warning uSv h o Table Rows 3 9 11 Thu 201 19 1 1 01 Neutron Warning ounts o hu 2010 08 1 5 eutron Warning ms o Thu 2010 08 1 B n 1 Neutron war t o i 2010 08 18 22 43 Gea rr proa MM Page Length Settings Figure 45 Anatomy of a web page with a data table You can set the maximum number of table rows shown per web page Er The current page length is remembered on your computer if cookies are allowed Depending on your page length setting and the total number of table entries a table might be split across multiple pages which you can navigate using the buttons above the table Proceed to the previous page of records xy Number of the current page and number of total pages Proceed to the next page of records You can have the table sorted by columns The current sorting status is indicated by an icon in the column title Click one of the icons to change table sorting Table is not sorted by this column Sy Table is sorted ascending by this column LS Table is sorted descending by this column Er The current sorting is remembered on your computer if cookies are allowed 2 4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server You can view details about a record listed in the table Opens a window or browser tab showing details of the record for further inspection or anal ysis see 2 4 3 p 56 2 4 3 Records on Web Pages These pages show the r
97. EE identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 10 Connecting via Satellite Phone this screen then select 33 9 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is now connected to the satellite phone via the paired SD1000 Bluetooth Periphery 17 Sep 12 23 Device Details Device name 5D1000v2 0 8 1475 Device address 00019514758c Connection DiakUp Network Figure 234 The Device Details indicates successfull pairing 4z Keep the satellite phone and SD1000 and the FLIR identiFINDER R300 within 10 m 33 ft of each other during use In some environments the devices may need to be kept even closer than this limit to maintain the pairing 10 2 Configuring Remote Server Settings for the Satellite Phone Although the previous section connected the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to the satellite phone set tings must still be established for accessing the satellite phone and the reachback server These settings are in the Remote Server Settings and may be established on the instrument directly see 6 24 p 149 or more efficiently through the web interface see 8 6 2 p 192 gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Remote Server Settings p 149 LL Settings p 180 Connectivity p 190 Remote Server p 192 User Name directinternet Password directinternet Connection String Connection string for satellite phone service provider Phone Number
98. FLIR identiFINDER R300 and its accessories 1 1 Conventions Used in This Document This document uses the following conventions to signify various kinds of text Ordinary Text looks like this sometimes bold or italics is used for emphasis Constant Width is used for URLs file names path names text you have to enter somewhere Information about danger for yourself an instrument or data A Information you should carefully consider before proceeding Additional information you should pay attention to x Atip suggests commands or procedures for advanced usage You might skip tips on your first pass through this document 4 Information related to particular variants of the product The path to a command or setting in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 menu hierarchy or the web inter face respectively is displayed at the beginning of appropriate sections as shown in the following examples gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Identification Options p 103 gt Identification Settings E Settings p 180 General p 184 Identification 1 2 Safety Warnings Q If you read this manual as a PDF document you can click cross references items in the table of contents links into the Internet or similar to immediately view the designated item 1 2 Safety Warnings The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is designed for outdoor use When operated in accordance with the operating instructions it
99. Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference e Mass Storage During mass storage mode no other functionality is available Figure 165 Starting the USB mass storage mode Settings and Commands Start the USB mass storage mode Figure 166 p 151 IUD Mass Storage 24 Mar 09 23 5 Mass Storage Open your computer s file browser and wait for your device to show up Figure 166 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 in USB mass storage mode All of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 network services will stop and after a few moments the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will be recognized as an external hard disk by the connected com puter Use the file manager of your computer to inspect for example the drivers on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Ed While the FLIR identiFINDER R300 acts as a hard drive you cannot operate it Rou tine jobs like monitoring the radiation for exceeding the alarm thresholds are not inter rupted identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tH 6 26 Network The FLIR identiFINDER R300 hard drive is write protected that is you cannot modify or add any data Return to the superior menu The FLIR identiFINDER R300 s network services will be reac tivated 626 Network gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Network LS Settings p 180 Connectivity p 190 Local Area Network p 190 This screen Fig
100. Figure 32 Editing Text After deleting a character the next character is selected To insert a character before the currently selected character use ED The existing characters including the selected one are pushed one position towards the end of the text Figure 33 p 46 After you finished editing the text press until you see the command and press 3 Figure 34 p 46 E Spaces at the start or end of the text if any are removed from your entry identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 E 2 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys mp AE REA Reports Operator Name Ja Dee Selected Entry Field Selected Character Voice Phone 1 800 555 0142 Reveal More Commands Insert Character Insert Figure 33 Editing Text After inserting space before Doe for an additional character M Settings 23 Mar 13 29 2 gt Operator Name Jane Doe Voice Phone 1 800 555 0142 Down Figure 34 Editing Text Done In case you change your mind you can editing the value with Q Reveal the command with 9399 if necessary The value in effect before you started editing with GS 3 299 will be reestab lished Pressing for a moment also cancels editing A Do not press O for too long That would power down your FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 2 7 Entering the Password If your FLIR identiFINDER R300 is protected by a password you will have to enter it before you can access most of the op
101. NDER R300 s database For the navigation of tables refer to section 2 4 2 p 55 Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Alarms omo Beginning Tue 2010 08 24 15 03 Neutron Warning 2 counts Tue 2010 08 24 12 14 Dose Rate Warning 1 028 p5v h Tue 2010 08 24 12 12 Dose Rate Warning 1 031 pSv h Fri 0210 08 24 12 12 Dose Rate Warning 1 002 p5v h Fri 2010 08 20 12 58 Neutron Warning 2 counts Thu 2010 08 19 14 53 Neutron Warning 2 counts Thu 2010 08 19 13 58 Neutron Warning 2 counts Thu 2010 08 19 02 43 Neutron Warning 2 counts Thu 2010 08 19 01 03 Neutron Warning 2 counts Wed 2010 08 18 22 43 Neutron Warning 2 counts ENKENER 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 214 Table of alarm records The table shows several columns for every record N The arbitrary reference number of the record Beginning The date and time the alarm was raised Duration The duration of the alarm If the instrument was switched off during the alarm the duration is not given identiFINDER RP Iaentl Fl Y D En n Ai 2014 4 1 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Type The type of alarm or warning Value The quantity which increased above the alarm threshold Open a page showing details see 8 13 1 p 207 ofthe record 8 13 1 Alarm Details Web Page Details of a single recor
102. Name The user name and Password the password for the dial up connection Both can be omitted with some carriers which use other means for authentication for example your SIM card Connection String Settings specifying the connection for example CGDCONT 1 IP web example com Phone Number The number for data connections for example 99 1 gt To configure your FLIR identiFINDER R300 for sending data to a remote server These steps are required once for a given combination of cell phone carrier and remote Server 1 Collect the required setup information see above from your cell phone carrier or your IT administrator 2 Enter the setup information into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 see 6 24 p 149 3 Enter the operator s your name and voice phone in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 see 6 27 p 153 so they can be included in reports to be sent 9 1 Internet Connection bx Entering these values is much more convenient via the web interface see 8 p 179 gt To prepare for sending data Em These steps are required before actually sending data for the first time after you switch on your FLIR identiFINDER R300 1 Place you cell phone in the vicinity of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 Pair your cell phone with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 see 6 23 3 p 144 A All the settings mentioned above are necessary to send data to a remote server If any item is missing you will be prompted to enter it
103. R300 Mini USB B connector and a computer USB A connector The USB socket of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is at the lower end of the instrument It is covered by a flap in the rubber boot Figure 180 p 168 Figure 180 USB socket covered by a flap in the rubber boot Use the Mini USB B to USB A cable supplied with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to establish the con nection 3 You can use any equivalent third party USB 2 0 cable 7 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer Always grab the plug atthe strain relief and slide it straight into or out ofthe receptacle Figure 181 p 169 Figure 181 Plugging and unplugging the cable Do not pull at the cable behind the connector and do not bend it when removing it from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 182 p 169 Figure 182 Do not bend the cable or the plug 1 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a Mass Storage Device 7 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a Mass Storage Device Computers supporting the connection of USB devices usually have a driver for devices identifying themselves as mass storage for example USB sticks or USB hard disks The FLIR identiFINDER R300 supports the same standard You can use this mode of operation for example to install the drivers for the web interface access 7 3 p 171 23 To mount the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as USB mass storage 1 Switch the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to mass storage mode see Mass Stora
104. RAeAGSEGEESXEEXEEGxX GEEEe 161 6 34 Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds llle 162 6 55 Neutron Alarm Thresholds 4 46464 5446446080 EEE E Ee Ree SEES 163 6 36 Current Alarm State 4 ooo BREMEN SD SEER RR OE OR OR OR OR OR OX X Xx 165 7 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer 167 7 1 Plugging and Unplugging msi 49 97 028 09 one on me ee a 168 7 2 The FLIR identiFINDERR300asaMassStorageDevice 170 7 3 Preparing the USB Network Connection on a Computer 171 Zl Pun 6 M C 171 Vau gcns AP 6 eh he osas Hl we we Es da e 171 7 3 3 Windows Vista Windows 7 175 7 4 Using the Network Connection eu aaaea aa REPPEPPEPPPSSEE GSia5333 178 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server 179 8 1 Info Web Page iia a ad ea c 8 a a DR D ew eS 181 Oe Resources Wel Page suono RRARERRARSERAGOSGSeGGsemmemxe3 182 Oo General Web Pace ss ovo ono nox OR Bebb OR EE E OROROR OR OR ORO OR OR AOR OR n 9 Ses 184 9 3 1 utei A 184 8 3 2 lden CAUSE pipe x 9 9 9 9 5 3 2 DOROReE S dm m wx m RR 184 8 3 3 AA 186 8 4 GPS and Clock Web Page annona 186 go Alarm Web Page nannaa aaa 9 RU R9 SOR ce RR mem cde e ccu de 188 9 5 1 Alarm IACICAO S uus mmm wee SEE EEE EEE EEO SH OO 188 8 5 2 GANA d cio ee sas sa 189 8 5 3 Neuton ARTS ona es S
105. Server X If the settings file contains data for settings not supported on your FLIR identiFINDER R300 the setting will be accepted but is obviously meaningless You will be informed about success or failure after the upload Reset Factory Settings Discard all changes you made to any ofthe FLIR identiFINDER R300 s settings and reestablish the settings made at the factory A The password see 2 2 7 p 46 if any is reset to the factory setting as well 8 10 Bulk Download Web Page DEN Data p 180 Bulk Download This web page lets you download all or a selection of the data saved in your FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database to your computer Figure 209 p 198 The records matching cer tain criteria will be wrapped into a zip archive and downloaded Date Selection Limit the records to be downloaded by their saving date in ISO 8601 notation S A pop up calendar helps you to enter the dates L Several buttons are available to enter common date combinations Today Last Week etc Start Date The date of the oldest record to be downloaded Leave this field empty to get the oldest record available in the database of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The date of the youngest record to be downloaded Leave this field empty to get the youngest record available in the database of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Data Types Limit the records to be downloaded by their type X The actual collection of availabl
106. TF 8 or with specialized XML editors The settings in the file are grouped into several categories and embedded comments help you find your way around 1 lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt 2 lt settings modelnumber nanoRaider ZH serialnumber 103156000000 gt 3 category name Display gt lt category gt lt Are warnings and alarms reported by the beeper gt 4 5 6 lt category name Alarm Indications gt T 8 lt setting name SoundAlarmIndication value True gt 9 lt Are warnings and alarms reported by the vibrator gt 10 lt setting name VibratorAlarmIndication value True gt 11 lt Are warnings and alarms reported by LEDs gt 12 lt setting name LightsAlarmIndication value True gt 13 lt category gt 14 category name Feedback gt 16 lt category gt 17 category name Nuclide gt 18 setting name Ag 110m value True 19 setting name Ag 110m Usage value IND 20 setting name Ag 110m Severity value Innocent 21 lt setting name Am 241 value True gt to be continued identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 9 Backup Web Page 22 setting name Am 241 Usage value IND 23 setting name Am 241 Severity value Threatening gt 24 433 20 setting name Xe 133 value True 26 setting name Xe 133 Usage value MED 27 lt setting name Xe 133 Severity value Inn
107. User Manual identiFINDER R300 Digital Handheld Gamma Spectrometer with Radionuclide Identification identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 This document is changed in accordance with our Quality Management system All changes are archived Revision identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 Product FLIR identiFINDER R300 Language English en Version 2014 4 13623 Latest Change February 19 2015 at 13 49 UTC 0600h SFLIR nanoRaider is a registered trademark of FLIR Detection Inc FLIR is a registered trademark of FLIR Systems Inc All other trademarks belong to their respective holders Copyright O 2012 2015 FLIR Detection Inc All rights reserved EE identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection Contents List of Figures 1 Welcome 1 1 Tu 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 Conventions Used in This Document ceres voc cic CD Before First Use osos som mo ee o ERE OR REOR OA OR RON OX ES The FLIR identiFINDERR300 c ee Unpacking and Identifying Accessories o ooo ee Instrument Description and Application Overview 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Zl Lids 2 3 2 4 249 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Display 2442464622486 88854 0666 6 mul cu cibp ro sra prada The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys coo oso 3 3 So Usine Command List 2555545555555 BBS xxx a
108. able in the database Figure 150 p 141 The date and time of saving the result is displayed while you step through the available records Em If you entered this command from the spectrum display see 6 2 p 106 the correct spectrum is already chosen A summary of the chosen record is shown Figure 151 p 141 so you can verify your choice and choose another one if necessary Please refer to section 6 21 p 137 for a description of the remaining steps to send data to a remote Server identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference 10 Spectrum 24 Mar 13 19 Choose Record Number 20 E 2011 05 24 12 29 50 minutes ago Skip Figure 150 Sending Data Choosing a spectrum 24 Mar 13 51 Send Type Spectrum Record Number 20 Saved on 2011 03 24 at Real Time GPS Coordinates Figure 151 Sending Data Spectrum summary 6 23 Bluetooth This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 supports two Bluetooth modes Bluetooth Serial Port Protocol SPP and Bluetooth Periphery While Bluetooth SPP Mode is enabled Bluetooth Periphery Mode is dis abled Bluetooth SPP Mode supports a command set see A 6 p 245 for system integrators to develop custom remote interfaces These two modes are described in the following sections 6 23 1 Bluetooth SPP Status This item i
109. aint samples Also used to ensure uniform thickness in rolling processes like steel and paper production May be combined with beryllium or lithium to produce a neutron source Barium 133Ba Ba 155 10 75a Bismuth 207p 93Bi BAZO 38a Cadmium 199Cd Cd 109 463 d Cesium EEES Cs 134 2 07a iS GS Cs 137 30 07 a Chromium 24 Cr Gr 51 Cobalt 37CO Co pT 27d17h 272d C Nuclide Library O Industrially used material Used in nuclear medicine for patient attenuation correction during an imaging technique i e S P E C T imaging for yielding 3D information ofthe patient s internal organs etc Industrially used material Principle use is for research and may be found as a by product of pro ton reactions with lead Industrially used material Used to analyze metal alloys when checking stock and also sorting scrap Industrially used material Used as a tracer for radiation leaks This nuclide is a fission product in nuclear reactors It can occur in the radioactive fall out resulting from hazardous incidents in nuclear power plants Industrially used material Used as radiotracers to measure and control the liquid flow in oil pipelines and to tell researchers whether oil wells are plugged by sand Utilized in density and fill height sensors to ensure the correct fill level for food drugs and other products This nuclide is a fission product in nuclear reactors It can occur in the
110. alent Dose Greenwich Mean Time GMT Originally the mean solar time at the Royal Observatory in Greenwich London Itis commonly but imprecisely used synonymously with Coordinated Universal Time when referring to time zones Gy Gray Half Life The duration it takes for a substance undergoing Decay to decrease by half HAZMAT Hazmat HazMat Hazardous materials and items dangerous goods D Glossary He Detector A device to detect thermal Neutrons Neutron Detection consisting of a tube filled with He and other gases under high pressure in a strong electric field Incident neutrons react with the helium yielding an electrical charge in the gas which can be detected similar as in a Geiger M ller Tube HPGe High Purity Germanium HPRDS Human Portable Radiation Detection System HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP A networking protocol for distributed collaborative hypermedia information systems es sential for data communication in the World Wide Web IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority International Organization for Standardization ISO International System of Units ASI Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA An organization responsible for the allocation of globally unique names and numbers that are used in Internet protocols internet Protocol IP A protocol used for data communication between devices in a network Intrin
111. alue false 26 Property name NeutronCountRateWarning value false ay Property name NeutronCountRateAlarm value false 28 Property name SigmaGammaAlarm value false 29 Property name SigmaNeutronAlarm value false 30 lt Update gt 0 Property Elements As shown there are multiple Property elements in a Status update name For reliability and future compatibility a parser should not rely on the order of the Property elements but should parse the name attribute of each Property element value For each Property element in a status update the value attribute will be either textual or numerical Many of those elements with a textual value attribute indicate a boolean state with the value being either true or false units A units attribute will be included when necessary to interpret a numerical value at tributes Only some Property elements have units Line 2 The SerialNumber placeholder in the example will be replaced with the unique serial num ber of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 sending the message Stabilization Line 4 Stabilization is only available on models without LED stabilization Dose and Dose Rate units Any dose units will be in either rem or Sievert Sv scaled units as required by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 settings see 6 31 p 159 The specified base unit for some properties will be dynamically scaled according to the property value while others are statically
112. archival or whatever process is implemented on the server see Figure 224 p 219 for a possible scenario REMOTE SERVER ANSI N42 42 Data n42 File process Formatted Reports ee pdf html Spc Spectra Files Charts Summaries Figure 224 A possible scenario for remote handling of FLIR identiFINDER R300 data identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN 9 1 Internet Connection The FLIR identiFINDER R300 uploads data in a file formatted according to ANSI N42 42 2006 p 269 via a standard HTTP POST command so all a server has to do is to process this file You can develop your own server software ask us see B 4 p 257 for the technical details and a reference example or have us build server software tailored to your needs The HTTP URI e g http n42 example com reachback of the remote server running the software to accept and handle the data sent by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 has to be stored in the instrument s settings under gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Remote Server Settings p 149 OS Settings p 180 Connectivity p 190 Remote Server p 192 XX The protocol http is part of the URI that is you can change it to https for secure transfer if required A https connections require a trusted SSL certificate on the server A Protocols other than http or https are not support
113. ary Element Pure substance consisting of Nuclides having the same number of Protons also known as Atomic Number sharing the same chemical properties The nuclear properties differ if the number of Neutrons varies in the nuclides Isotope Also known as Chemical Element Equivalent Dose A measure of the radiation Dose absorbed by tissue where an attempt has been made to consider the different relative biological effects of different types of Ionizing Radiation The equivalent dose is calculated by weighting the Absorbed Dose with a factor selected for the type and energy of the radiation The weighting factor ranges from 1 for Gamma Radi ation and Beta Radiation to higher values for Alpha Radiation Protons and Neutrons eV Electron Volt Extensible Markup Language XML False Alarm An Alarm not caused by a radioactive source under the specified background conditions False Alarm Rate FAR The number of False Alarms per duration FAR False Alarm Rate Fast Neutron Neutron Temperature FGPu Fuel Grade Plutonium Fission An exothermic nuclear process in which a Nucleus is usually absorbing a Neutron and two fission fragments and a few fission neutrons emerge Also known as Nuclear Fission Fuel Grade Plutonium FGPu A mixture of Pu Pu and other Isotopes which contains between 7 96 and 19 96 Pu Further grades are Reactor Grade Plutonium and Weapons Grade Plutoni
114. ation 268 Absorbed Dose 268 Accept key function 35 39 41 42 45 47 118 122 125 127 128 137 138 143 149 150 153 155 159 164 Acknowledge key function 71 98 Acquisition Duration property 106 Acrylic Glass 268 Activity 268 Activity Concentration 268 Adjustment 268 Administration web menu 181 Advanced Menu command 103 Advanced Options menu 104 Alarm 268 Alarm setting 162 164 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 INDEX Alarm web page 180 Alarm Indicators command 105 160 Alarm Indicators web section 180 Alarm Options menu 105 Alarms 97 Gamma 98 Neutrons 101 Alarms web page 180 Alpha Particle 268 Alpha Radiation 268 Altitude property 132 Am 2441 key function 116 American National Standards Institute ANSI 269 ANSI 269 ANSI N42 42 269 Army Time 269 Astronomical Time 269 Atom 269 Atomic Mass 269 Atomic Mass Number 269 Atomic Number Z 269 Automated Mode 93 Automated Mode Settings command 104 135 Available setting 158 Available Files web section 181 Available Memory property 130 B p Particle 269 INDEX p Radiation 269 Background Radiation 269 Backlight 232 Backlight setting 124 Backup web page 180 Backup web section 180 Battery 29 Becquerel Bq 270 Beeper setting 161 Beginning property 206 Beta Particle 270 Beta Radiation 270 Bluetoot
115. ations or a value from 1 1 to 9 9 The lower the value the better the sensitivity for radiation increases but the more notifications you can expect Higher values are recommended to reduce false notifications in environments with generally low radiation levels D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Om Edit composite values see 2 2 4 p 40 for details Return to the superior menu 6 35 Neutron Alarm Thresholds 4 This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with a neutron detector see A 1 p 237 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 L 6 35 Neutron Alarm Thresholds gt Options Menu p 103 gt Alarm Options p 105 gt Neutron Alarm Thresholds EL Settings p 180 Alarm p 188 gt Neutron Alarms p 190 This screen Figure 177 p 164 groups the thresholds for neutron warnings and alarms X For meaningful alerts specify an alarm threshold above the warning threshold LETT Settings 22 Mar 17 27 EAE E Neutron Thresholds Alarm 10 counts 60 s Warming 2 counts 60 s o Alarm On Down Exit Figure 177 Neutron alarm threshold settings Settings and Commands Alarm The minimum number of neutrons per minute to trigger an alarm You can specify values between 2 and 500 The minimum number of neutrons per minute to trigger a warning You can spec
116. aved Record Spectrum saved as N 77 Figure 95 Identification Mode Identification was not possible Start the identification measurement Cycle the list of commands see 2 2 1 p 35 Go to Acida see 6 21 p 137 avoiding the detour around the normal options menu hierarchy The current identification will be already chosen for sending Return to the previous mode EE MM identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 4 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes 000 Identification 18 Mar 13 51 Nuclide Names Nuclide Usage Identification Confidence N u cl ides Sit 9 Fu 152 m 0 7 Cs 137 IND Q 5 Unknown UK A Reference Number of the Saved Record Identification saved as N 7 Figure 96 Identification Mode Identified radionuclides Acquire more data to improve the identification The acquisition continues for the duration you specified see 6 4 p 116 no matter whether you limited the duration or the minimum number of counts for the initial acquisition Inspect the acquired spectrum A This command is available only after you entered the password or if the password pro tection is off Please refer to 6 2 p 106 for options and commands for spectrum viewing After you return from the spectrum you can to acquire data or 2319 the identification mode 4 4 Automated Mode In automated mode the FLIR identiFINDER R300 collects data for a radionuclide identification at specified time
117. azmat HazMat 275 3He Detector 275 Home web menu 179 Horizontal Coordinates property 106 HPGe 276 HPRDS 276 HTTP 276 HTTP URI setting 150 HTTP URI property 228 Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP 276 l IANA 276 Identification web section 180 Identification Mode 90 Identification Options menu 103 Identification Settings command 103 116 Identifications web page 180 Identify key function 75 90 113 Ignore key function 255 Info web page 179 Insert key function 45 150 154 Install key function 255 Integration Time setting 158 INDEX International Organization for Standardization 276 International System of Units 276 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA 276 Internet Protocol IP 276 Intrinsic Activity 276 Ion 276 Ionizing Radiation 276 IP 277 IP Address 277 IP Address property 130 IrOBEX 277 ISO International Organization for Standardization 277 Isobar 277 Isomer 277 Isotone 278 Isotope 278 J J 278 Joule J 278 K K 40 key function 116 KCl 278 Key Functions 35 38 39 41 42 44 118 122 125 127 128 137 138 143 149 150 153 155 159 164 35 41 42 44 118 122 125 127 128 137 138 143 149 150 153 155 159 164 30 s 95 Accept 35 39 41 42 45 47 118 122 125 127 128 137 138 143 149 150 153 155 159 164 INDEX Acknowledge 71 98 Am 241 116 Calibratio
118. back server Delete the shown record from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database Em Records referred to by another record for example a spectrum referred to by an iden tification measurement are not actually deleted but marked as unreachable for future direct accesses BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 x One T ouch Reachback i Settings http n42 example com Reachback Generating Report Contacting Server Sending data Figure 49 Successful transmission of data to a reachback server 24 4 Printing Web Pages You can print web pages with the usual printing procedures of your web browser Some of the shown elements are suppressed when printing web pages for example the navigation menus or push buttons Figure 50 p 60 Many web browsers suppress printing of background images and colors For better printing results we recommend to tick the appropriate boxes Look for settings like Print Background Colors Print Background Images Print Background Images and Colors 2 4 5 Password Entry An optional 6 13 p 129 password may protect against unauthorized or accidental access to ad vanced settings and commands of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 If a password is set 6 12 p 128 you have to enter it in the instrument see 2 2 7 p 46 or in the web interface Figure 51 p 61 to gain access A When entering the FLIR identiFIN
119. ce M Bluetooth SPP Settings e Bluetooth SPP Settings Figure 153 Bluetooth SPP Settings and Commands Enable SPP When set to On the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will attempt to connect in SPP mode using the Bluetooth SPP settings If set to Off then Bluetooth Periphery mode can be enabled see 6 23 3 p 144 Specify the maximum elapsed time during which the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will be discov erable after discovery is initiated You can specify values from 0 s to 100000 s A value of 0s will disable discovery timeout This specifies how the FLIR identiFINDER R300 should configure the Bluetooth SPP Mode after a Bluetooth connection is lost Discover If a Bluetooth SPP connection is lost the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will enable Discovery for the specified timeout period Off If a Bluetooth SPP connection is lost the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will disable Blue tooth D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 23 Bluetooth 623 3 Bluetooth Periphery This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 Connectivity Options p 104 gt Bluetooth Periphery gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 This command Figure 154 p 144 shows the Bluetooth device
120. citly switch it off Finder Mode Return to the Dose Rate Mode from the Finder Mode when you don t need it anymore see 4 2 p 88 Spectrum Acquisition Stop the data acquisition for spectra see 6 2 p 106 when you don t need it anymore L Other functions draw extra power as well but are irrelevant in this context The web server for example is active only while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is connected to an external power source anyway 12 Accessories for the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Chapter 12 Accessories for the FLIR identiFINDER R300 This chapter gives an overview ofthe various accessories available for the FLIR identiFINDER R300 some are included with certain variants others are sold separately 12 1 Source Set The source set sold separately is a collection of radiation sources for calibration testing or train ing purposes Figure 237 Source set sold separately Source sets are available in the variants shown in the table below each set comprising 8 plastic disks containing radionuclides bonded as chloride 12 1 Source Set RSS8 133Ba 152 Eu 137 Cs 22Na 54Mn 5705 60Co 1370 657n RSS8EOD2 133Ba 152 Eu Mix 137 Cs 22Na 54Mn 57Co 60Co 109 q RSS8EOD3 133Ba 152 Eu 137 Cs 22Na 54Mn Co 60Co 109 q RSS8EOD4 133Ba 152 Eu 37000 37000 37000 37000 37000 37000 37000 18500 37000 37000 37000 9250 37000 37000 37000 37000 370
121. cord pages refer to section 2 4 3 p 56 identiFINDER p4 Iaenti Fl DER F 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 103156000000 nanoRaider Info Settings 2 Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Identification NO 50 ggg Saved on Wed 2010 08 25 09 51 Neutron Alarm No This identification was saved by the Automated Mode Nuclide Information Spectrum Information Start Time Wed 2010 08 25 09 45 Real Time 364 05 Live Time 362 0s Dead Time 0 5 120 Counts 62 Energy Range 234 237 keV 100 Gross counts 4853 100 Maximum 0 970 uSv h Average 0 821 uSv h Minimum 0 690 uSv h Duration 3645 Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Minimum 0 counts Maximum 0 counts Total 0 counts Duration 3645 Download RA 2013 1 FUR Racist e Figure 211 Details of an identification result record To download the shown record click and follow the directions given by your web browser identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 12 Spectra Web Page The name of the downloaded zip archive begins with the serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 followed by the type and the reference number of the record for example 103156000000 Identification 4 11 zip The downloaded archive contains files in severa
122. ctra Settings and Commands Erase Delete all saved spectra Cancel Keep the saved spectra and return to the superior menu 6 17 Erase All Alarms Options Menu p 103 More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Maintenance p 104 gt Erase Data p 104 gt Erase All Alarms This command compare Figure 141 p 133 deletes all alarms saved in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s permanent memory identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 A 6 18 Erase All Screenshots Settings and Commands Frase Delete all saved alarms Cancel Keep the saved alarms and return to the superior menu 6 18 Erase All Screenshots gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Maintenance p 104 gt Erase Data p 104 gt Erase All Screenshots This command compare Figure 141 p 133 deletes all screenshots saved in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s permanent memory Settings and Commands Frase Delete all screenshots Cancel Keep the screenshots and return to the superior menu 6 19 Self Test 9 Options Menu p 103 More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Maintenance p 104 gt Self Test This command tests the display screen and activates all the alarm annunciators to demonstrate their proper operation Settings and Commands Start the test The display should show several test patterns in the main colors red green and
123. d Road Oak Ridge TN 37830 USA T 1 865 220 8700 F 1 865 220 7187 radiation support flir com detectionsupport com radiation Service Europe Africa Middle East FLIR Detection Inc Luxemburgstraat 2 2321 Meer Belgium T 32 0 3665 5106 F 32 0 3303 5624 radiation support flir com detectionsupport com radiation 2014 3 FLIR Radiation Page Footer Software Version Figure 41 Anatomy of a FLIR identiFINDER R300 web page narrow layout The bottom of the pages is marked by the page footer Especially on systems without visible scroll bars most mobile phones and tablet computers this footer indicates that you have seen all of the page Apart from the width the main difference between the narrow and wide layouts of web pages is the menu in the page header The wide layout uses the space to show the top level of the menu in a bar Figure 42 p 53 the narrow layout Figure 41 p 52 shows a button If you click a menu in either layout the menu hierarchy below that item is revealed and you can navigate to the desired web page Figure 43 p 53 Figure 44 p 54 EM identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 Serial Serial Number 103156000000 Number Type of Instrument nanoRaider Top Level Home Settings 2 Data Menu Chosen Menu Info Page Title A system Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Administration GPS S
124. d are shown on an individual page Figure 215 p 207 which you can open from the table of records Figure 214 p 206 by clicking Show For the navigation of records and other common elements of record pages refer to section 2 4 3 p 56 Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Alarm NO 13 o0 00957 Alarm Information Alarm Type Dose Rate Warning Beginning Tue 2010 08 24 12 12 Duration 905 Value 1 031 pSv h Alarm Settings Threshold 1 000 pSv h 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 215 Details of an alarm record 8 14 Screenshots Web Page E Data p 180 gt Screenshots This web page Figure 216 p 208 lists the screenshots saved in the database of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 see 2 2 8 p 49 cf 7 2 p 170 Py IT Lona E rI FO h y p a wt IPA iG U c U J Jans FIRINCD nonni JANINA Alanc ac antil inN io R 28 l nmn 7l A il 2 ll identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13 8 15 Live Screen Web Page Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Screenshots o o File name SendSpectrumScreen Wed 2010 08 04 21 15 SendSpectrumScreen Wed 2010 08 04 22 01 SendSpectrumScreen Wed 2010 08 04 22 47 SendAnalysisScreen Wed 2010 08 04 22 01 SendAnalysisscreen Wed 2010 08 04 22 47 ChooseDataScr
125. d by one screen pixel Figure 118 p 112 If you move the cursor off screen the spectrum scrolls with the cursor After the cursor reaches the end of the spectrum it will re appear on the other side Zoom ROI Thespectrum is scaled to fitthe ROI into the available screen width Figure 119 p 113 If you try to move the cursor off screen the scale is changed to ensure the cursor re mains visible Clear Clear the current spectrum You have to confirm this command with or change your mind with MKD identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tt 6 2 Spectrum End Coordinate of Horizontal Axis Otart Coordinate of Horizontal Axis uua y Spectrum 29 Mar 17 16 ai y counts 606 keV 1536 keV a 4 RT 1 1 8s Gc 1660 4 0 060 uSv h DI 0 696 Nc 258 foom 1 1 Figure 117 Spectrum Scale First half of spectrum visible End Coordinate of Horizontal Axis Start Coordinate of Horizontal Axis Ui y Spectrum 29 Mar 17 37 1053 keV J 3 414 counts 606 keV Horizontal Scale T 34 Zoom g RT 1 1 8s Gc 1660 4 0 060 uSv h DI 0 696 Nc 258 foom ROI Figure 118 Spectrum Scale One display pixel equals the width of one spectral channel A This command clears the current spectrum but does not stop the current acquisition of data if any Save Save the current spectrum The reference number of the saved spectrum will be shown until you acknowledge it Ifther
126. de spc files in bulk download Include spe files in bulk download Yes 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 205 Connectivity Settings web page identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 7 Bluetooth SPP Settings Web Page 8 6 2 Remote Server ES Settings p 180 Connectivity p 190 Remote Server This web page section Figure 205 p 191 lets you configure the connection of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a remote server via Bluetooth Dial Up Networking You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Remote Server Settings p 149 8 6 3 Reports LS Settings p 180 Connectivity p 190 gt Reports This web page section Figure 205 p 191 lets you configure the contents of reports generated by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Report Settings p 153 8 6 4 Download Options EY Settings p 180 Connectivity p 190 gt Download Options This web page section Figure 205 p 191 lets you specify the type of th
127. e lated to local and remote network connections To transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 click Save 8 6 1 Local Area Network LoS Settings p 180 Connectivity p 190 Local Area Network This web page section Figure 205 p 191 lets you configure the connection of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a local area network You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Network p 152 A It is recommended to restart your FLIR identiFINDER R300 after changing network settings If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently connected to an external device you have to reestablish the connection according to the new settings 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 1031 nanoHalder Settings E Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Connectivity Local Area Network Device Name Remote Server User Name Password Connection String CGDCONT 1 IP web example com Phone Number 22 1z HTTP URI http n42 example com reachback Reports Voice Phone 1 800 555 0142 Operator Name Jane Doe Download Options Include n42 2012 files in bulk download Include n42 2006 files in bulk download Inclu
128. e 6 5 p 118 are reported as Unknown You can specify whether confidence usage or severity are shown see 6 4 p 116 Return to the spectrum display identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN 6 2 Spectrum 1 Spectrum 21 Mar 11 37 42 Nuclide Names z Nuclide Usage Identification Confidence Nucl ides Nuclide na 7 Cs 137 mw 0 6 Eu 152 iD Q O ND Reference Number of the Saved Record Identification saved as NO 6 Figure 121 Radionuclides identified in the current spectrum Go to AE see 6 21 p 137 avoiding the detour around the normal op tions menu hierarchy The current identification will be already chosen for sending cD CD CD D Cycle the methods for the vertical scaling The current method is indicated in the status bar right of the chart Figure 112 p 109 The method you get after pressing the key is shown in the key description For logarithmic linear and square root scaling the maximum peak is rendered so it makes best use of the available screen height The other scalings stretch the rendering so that only the given bottom fraction of the spectrum is visible Higher peaks are cut off GI5 Cycle the options for the display of horizontal coordinates in the spectrum The current unit and range is shown above the chart Figure 112 p 109 and Figure 110 p 107 The variant you get after pressing the key is shown in the key description Calibrat
129. e files to be downloaded from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a connected computer You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Download Settings p 154 8 Bluetooth SPP Settings Web Page 4 This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 e settings p 180 Bluetooth SPP Settings This section automatically forwards to the Bluetooth SPP Options web page see 8 7 1 p 192 8 7 1 Bluetooth SPP Settings Web Page This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 O settings p 180 Bluetooth SPP Settings p 192 Bluetooth SPP Settings 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server This web page Figure 206 p 193 allows you to enable and configure the Bluetooth SPP mode Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Home Settings Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Bluetooth SPP Eluetooth SPP Settings Enable SPP Protocol SPP PIN administratorl 23 Discovery timeout Enter discovery mode after disconnect Discover Now 2014 4 FLIR Radiation Figure 206 Bluetooth Settings web page If Enable SPP Protocol is set to On then selecting will make t
130. e has associated information about its occurrence or field of application which you can have shown in identification results Figure 96 p 93 You can adapt the usage for all the nuclides in the library according to your needs with this command Figure 125 p 120 Settings and Commands Choose one from the list of nuclides to edit the associated usage see C p 259 Cycle the list of commands see 2 2 1 p 35 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tt 6 7 Nuclide Severity p Nuclide Usage In 111 MED Ir 192 IND K 40 Mn 54 IND Select Figure 125 Usage information in the nuclide list used by the identification algorithm ED D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 7 Nuclide Severity gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Identification Options p 103 gt Nuclide Severity Im settings p 180 gt Nuclides p 193 Built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is a library used to identify the nuclides causing gamma ra diation Please refer to Appendix C p 259 for further information about the nuclides in this library Every nuclide has associated information about its potential danger which you can have shown in identification results Figure 96 p 93 You can adapt the severity for the nuclides in the library according to your needs with this comma
131. e is not enough free memory to store the spectrum you will be informed You can delete saved spectra see 6 16 p 133 if necessary Load a saved spectrum You can choose from all the saved spectra While you step through the list the saving date of the spectrum is displayed Figure 120 p 113 to assist you with making a selection EM identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference End Coordinate of Horizontal Axis 30 Mar 09 05 414 counts 606 keV 3072 c Otart Coordinate of Horizontal Axis an 7 Spectrum d Horizontal Scale Zoom 4 RT 1 1 8s Gc 1660 4 0 060 uSv h DI 0 696 Nc 258 foom 3MeV Figure 119 Spectrum Scale The defined ROI fits into the available screen width M Spectrum 21 Mar 11 05 2 Choose Record Number EEE M 2011 03 21 11 03 2 minutes ago Figure 120 Choosing a saved spectrum to be loaded for display To cancel loading a spectrum press O If you load a spectrum while acquiring data the current spectrum is discarded but the acquisition is not stopped That is fresh data are added to the loaded spectrum Cu Let the FLIR identiFINDER R300 apply its identification algorithm to the current spectrum A list of identified nuclides if any is displayed and saved Figure 121 p 114 DI Nuclides the identification algorithm did not recognize or those recognized but having their visibility suppressed se
132. e text or numerical value When a literal value is used in an example instead of placeholder text it will be shown in red text such as in this attribute pair encoding utf 8 See Listing A 1 However keep in mind that the literal value shown may be only one of several possible values for that AttributeValue In many cases other possible values will be enumerated in the description after the listing A 6 4 General Command Format Command messages are sent to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and will be of the general format shown in Listing A 1 Listing A 1 General Command Format Codi wGaesisbewnes o0 Queso da E Str Command name CommandName gt Argument name ArgName value ArgValue gt lt Command gt 10 Line 1 XML Declaration The XML declaration is the same for all messages and should be verbatim as shown on Line 1 Line 2 Command element A command message will contain one Command element as the root element How a command message will be parsed and what if any Argument child elements will be expected and inter preted are determined by the name attribute of the Command element shown in the example with the CommandName placeholder value 1 A Info Pool Lined 3 Argument element s A command message may contain zero one or multiple Argument elements as children to the root element Any Argument elements will each have two attribute specifications in the form of attribute name attribut
133. e types depends on the variant of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 Identifications Include identification results in the archive Include spectra in the archive Include other data types in the archive 8 10 Bulk Download Web Page Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Data i Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Bulk Download Date Selection C a A 13 n 7751 f EET 2 13 mi j n 1 fi TEAN End Date IW d ASIN Start Date e g e g 2013 03 01 TUAM hd b us To download all records leave these fields empty Data Types Identifications Number of records 3 Number of records 15 Alarms Number of records 22 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Screenshots Download Figure 209 Bulk download web page x After you have checked a box the number of records matching the data selection criteria is shown Download Initiate the download The name of the downloaded zip archive begins with the serial number of the FLIR identiFINDERR300 followed by the type of contents for example 103156000000 Bulk Download zip Depending on the configuration of your web browser the archive will be downloaded to your standard download folder or your browser will ask you to name a destination folder and a file name The downloaded archive contains folders for every data type These folders contain folders for the available file formats of that type The actua
134. e value pairs ArgName Each Argument element will have a name attribute shown in the example with the ArgName placeholder value ArgValue Each Argument element will also have a value attribute shown in the example with the ArgValue placeholder value Line 4 The ellipsis in this example are not part of the actual message and serve to indicate additional Argument elements may be allowed for a command Line 5 The root Command element is closed completing the XML portion of the message The message is then terminated with the NUL character at the end of line 5 This is not part of the XML specification but is required by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a message delimiter A 6 5 General Update Format Update messages are sent from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a response to a command or trig gered by an event or user setting and will be of the following general format Listing A 2 General Update Format lt a sesso Lc D Saco oa aa es P np a 0 Yom Update name CommandName type nanoRaider id SerialNumber gt Property name PropertyName value PropertyValue units PropertyUnits gt lt Update gt 10 Line 1 XML Declaration The XML declaration is the same for all messages Line 2 Update element The message will will contain one Update element as the root element A 6 Bluetooth Serial Port Profile SPP Communication Overview name What Property child elements will be pre
135. ed The FLIR identiFINDER R300 will transfer data to this address with a HTTP POST command using these parameters serialnumber The serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 reachbackfile The ANSI N42 42 formatted data file To check the file contents locally you can download a file with the same contents via the web interface see 8 p 179 To verify proper reception of the data sent the instrument checks for a success message a X ReachbackSuccess HTTP header or an error message a X ReachbackError HTTP header with the error message as the header s value In case of an error the FLIR identiFINDER R300 shows this message on the screen 91 Internet Connection You can connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to the Internet via a computer already connected see 8 p 179 or by tethering your cell phone to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 225 p 221 which is possible if e your cell phone supports Dial Up Networking DUN via Bluetooth 9 Sending Data to a Remote Server Internet ES Cell Phone with Dial Up Networking Support C3 Bluetooth the Internet e Computer connected to FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 225 Connection for uploading FLIR identiFINDER R300 data to a remote server e your phone carrier provides the necessary infrastructure and data plan To setup the connection you need the correct credentials and access information provided by your cell phone carrier in particular User
136. ed to the existing spectrum To record a pristine spectrum use the com mand first see below The acquisition of spectrum data does not stop if you navigate to another web page or even disconnect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 from the computer The acquisition of spectrum data stops in one of the following events e You end the acquisition with Stop e You end the acquisition on the instrument with see 4 5 p 95 Ko We recommend to stop data acquisition before you exit the live spectrum to relieve the FLIR identiFINDER R300 from processing spectrum data Stops the acquisition of data Clears the spectrum A This command clears the current spectrum but does not stop the current acquisition of data if any Applies the identification algorithm to the current spectrum The result is shown above the chart Figure 220 p 214 The identification result is stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database The reference numbers of identification results saved during this live spectrum session are shown in a sec tion below the chart Saves the current spectrum into the database of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The reference numbers of spectra saved during this live spectrum session are shown in a section below the chart e Logarithmic Switches to logarithmic scaling along the vertical axis of the spectrum chart FLIR Detection Switches to square root scaling along the vertical axis of the spectrum chart EE iden
137. een Wed 2010 08 04 22 47 ChooseDatascreen Wed 2010 08 04 22 47 SendDataConfigurationActioninformationscreen Wed 2010 08 04 22 47 SpectrumNuclideListScreen Wed 2010 08 04 23 54 ViewDataLoggingScreen Wed 2010 09 08 23 30 EE 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 216 Table of screenshots After you hold the pointer over the name of a screenshot file for a moment the screenshot will appear in an overlay To download a screenshot file to your computer click its name and follow the directions given by your web browser 8 15 Live Screen Web Page CUR Live Screen This web page reflects the screen of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 217 p 209 The image is updated every 2 seconds You can operate your FLIR identiFINDER R300 with the instrument keyboard see 2 2 p 32 or by clicking the buttons in the web page image DER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Data z Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration a x ENTIRE A e ose Fir A Ca B y E ir 09 4 1 Ez A bh re a ao ri a E iz z Dose Rate se ae 0 017 cps Neutrons 1 1 Finder Options 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 217 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 s screen live in the web interface Be patient when clicking or pressing buttons Your actions are recognized but the image is
138. een the input gamma ray energies and the processed electronic output signals For high precision spectroscopy appli cations it is therefore inevitable to carefully gauge the assembly to map the non proportional deviating energies on to the correct incident values This process is referred to as Lineariza tion Live Time LT A detection system is able to record events during the live time that is while not being busy processing events in the Dead Time cf Real Time Local Maximum Peak D Glossary Low Self Discharge Nickel Metal Hydride LSD NiMH The type of rechargeable batteries built into the FLIR powerPACK ultra LSD NiMH Low Self Discharge Nickel Metal Hydride LT Live Time MAC Address Media Access Control Address Mass Number A The total number of Protons and Neutrons together known as Nucleons in an atomic Nucleus Also known as Atomic Mass Number Nucleon Number MCS Multi Channel Scaling Media Access Control Address MAC Address A unique identifier assigned to most network adapters or network interface cards by the manufacturer for identification in a network Metric Prefixes A Unit Prefixes Military Time 724 Hour Clock Moderator A medium with a high content of hydrogen e g Polyethylene reducing the speed of fast Neutrons thus turning them into thermal neutrons Used for example to enhance Neutron Detection sensitivity for systems which can detect thermal neut
139. elevant for certain variants only are labeled with the variant Detectors Gamma CdZnTe Neutrons He Proportional Counter Tube GPS Performance Energy Range Gamma Dose Rate Channel Energy Range Gamma Identification Channel Throughput Dose Rate Channel Throughput Identification Channel Sensitivity 1 Cs Identification Channel Sensitivity 1 Cs Dose Rate Channel Gamma Spectrum Three crystals 15 mm 0 59 in x 13 mm 0 51 in X 5 mm 0 20 in 5 96 15 mm 0 59 in x 54 mm 2 13 in net 14 mm 0 55 in x 29 mm 1 14 in 8 atm 8 106 bar 66 channel MediaTek MT3329 receiver sensitivity 165 dBm 51 keV 3 MeV 30 keV 3 MeV 250 kcps 180 kcps 70 47 cps per 10 nSv h 20 81 cps per 10 nSv h 1024 channels 3 MeV A 1 identiFINDER R 300 Specifications Dose Rate Range Dose Rate Accuracy 1 Cs Overload Threshold Neutron Sensitivity Nuclide Identification Typical Resolution Service Recommended Interval Physical Dimensions W x D x H Weight Weight Housing Material Environmental Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Temperature Change Relative Humidity Shock Resistance Protection Rating Battery Type Capacity Battery Life Charging Duration Operating Duration Display Type Cle 100 nSv h 10 mSv h x10 urem h 1 0 rem h 30 5 mSv h 2 6 cps nv 20 According to ANSI N42 48 lt 3 5 FWHM at 662 keV at 25 C 77 F
140. enance 104 More Options 103 Options Menu 103 Send Data 104 Metric Prefixes 279 Military Time 279 Mn 54 key function 116 Moderator 279 More Options menu 103 Multi Channel Scaling MCS 279 INDEX Mute key function 71 98 165 Cursor Left key function 109 N N42 279 n42 2006 setting 155 n42 2012 setting 154 n42 file type 154 202 204 n42 279 Na 22 key function 116 Nal 279 Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material NORM 279 Navstar Global Positioning System 280 Network command 104 152 Neutron 280 Neutron Alarm 9 property 200 Neutron Alarm Thresholds command 163 Neutron Alarm Thresholds 4 command 105 Neutron Alarms 4 web section 180 Neutron Count property 106 Neutron Detection 280 Neutron Rate property 157 Neutron Temperature 280 Neutrons property 157 Next Measurement property 136 Nickel Metal Hydride NiMH 280 NID 280 NiMH 280 N property 199 202 206 NORM 280 Nuclear Fission 280 Nuclear Fusion 281 Nucleon 281 Nucleon Number 281 Nucleus 281 Nuclide 281 Nuclide property 115 Nuclide Severity command 103 120 Nuclide Usage command 103 119 Nuclide Visibility command 103 118 Nuclides web page 180 Nuclides setting 118 120 0 OBEX 281 OBject EXchange OBEX 281 OK key function 47 Open Source Software web section 180 Operator Name setting 153
141. eported visually Figure 104 p 101 The appropriate behavior ofthe annunciators is detailed in Figure 105 p 101 IIT Alarm Neutrons 18 Mar 16 03 Ede Alarm Dose 8 8 1 Sv Dose Rate 2 738 puSv h Neutrons 0 833 cps Mute Acknowledge Figure 104 Alarm display Neutron alarm Figure 105 Neutron incidents as announced by the blue LED beeper and vibrator 5 3 Sigma Notifications The FLIR identiFINDER R300 continuously monitors the radiation level and uses a smart algorithm to detect unusual increases These events are announced as o notification in the display s title bar Figure 106 p 102 and optionally via beeper and vibrator identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tt 5 3 Sigma Notifications x o notifications are based on the increase of the radiation level over time Other than the alarms described above they do not depend on the absolute level ann diste ioe np c Alarm Dose Rate 29 Mar 13 09 Alternates with 1 1 the Normal Tit Dose Rate EN Oe 0 120 Options Figure 106 Dose rate display with o notification o notifications are especially useful while you carry the instrument on your belt because the in strument calls for your attention by beeping and flashing upon the sudden increase of the radiation level You can activate the announcements and control the sensitivity see 6 34 p 162 6 35 p 163 EMEN identiFINDER R300 en
142. er to provide adequate moderation of fast neutrons and to simulate the field operation instructions given here 3 3 Locating a Radiation Source Once you suspect the presence of a radiation source from observing the environment you should use the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s Finder Mode 4 2 p 88 to determine the exact location of the source gt To locate a radiation source 1 Move the instrument to a low radiation position for a background measurement 2 Press to switch from Dose Rate Mode to Finder Mode 3 Wait until the FLIR identiFINDER R300 finishes the background measurement Figure 68 p 74 Em If you are in a hurry you can Q the background measurement not recom mended The instrument will use the most recent background taken after it was switched on 4 Move the instrument around to find the radiation source 3 3 Locating a Radiation Source O Finder Background Current Count Rate 15 S of 30 5 c Measuring Duration Figure 68 Finder mode Initial background measurement The FLIR identiFINDER R300 averages the count rate for adjustable intervals see 6 30 p 157 and will guide you with its display Figure 69 p 74 but mainly by emitting sounds indicating the distance to the source The closer you are to the source the more excited the beeper and the vibrator get Listening to the beeper you can move around to look for the source while watching your step instead of t
143. erface provides all the settings and commands you know from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 itself but with the added convenience of a larger screen and a real keyboard Point your web browser to the address given after establishing a network connection see 7 4 p 178 Please refer to section 2 4 p 51 for the principle operation ofthe web pages outlined below The main menu offers the following groups of web pages MA Inspect general information about the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Inspect and edit settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 ETA Inspect and download data from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database Remote control the screen and buttons of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Live Spectrum H Acquire and analyze gamma spectra with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Manage the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and install software updates The complete hierarchy of web pages in the main and secondary menus and their sections is shown in the following list References point to the manual sections explaining the listed items in more detail see 8 1 p 181 see 8 1 p 181 see 8 1 p 181 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server FLIR Detection see 8 2 p see 8 2 p see 8 2 p see 8 5 1 p see 8 5 2 p 190 see 8 6 p see 8 6 1 p 192 Pe lee 192 192 see 8 7 1 p see 8 8 p see 8 9 p see 8 9 p see 8 9 p see 8 10 p see 8 10
144. es Saved on Type Neutron Alarm with Sorting Buttons Wed 2010 08 25 10 51 Manual oO Manual Nuclide Information Manual Auto Wed 2010 08 25 09 45 Manual o 0 Wed 2010 08 25 09 36 Auto Wed 2010 08 25 09 21 Auto Wed 2010 08 25 07 49 Manual Wed 2010 08 25 07 48 Manual Wed 2010 08 25 07 26 Manual oo Ee 2013 1 FLIR Radiation 3 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 76 Table of identification result records 6 To view a summary of a record hover the pointer over the table row of the record Figure 76 p 79 Not available on touch driven devices without pointer 7 To view a detailed report of a record click Show The details will be shown on separate page Figure 77 p 80 8 To print the report use your browser s Print command 9 To download the identification record to your computer in the formats specified in the set tings 8 6 4 p 192 click and follow the instructions of your web browser rpDpOn identiFINDER R 3 5 Communicate with a Local Computer nanoRaider Info Settings 2 Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Identification NO 50 OI Identification Information Saved on Wed 2010 08 25 09 51 Neutron Alarm No This identification was saved by the Automated Mode Nuclide Information Spectrum Information Start Time Wed 2010
145. es available for calibration check The command description names the nuclide you get after executing the command the current nuclide is shown next to the spectrum chart Clear Clear the acquired data The acquisition of data is not interrupted Return to the superior menu 6 4 Identification Settings gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Identification Options p 103 gt Identification Settings LoS Settings p 180 General p 184 gt Identification p 184 BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference This screen Figure 123 p 117 groups options that influence the identification of nuclides see 4 3 p 90 21 Mar 12 51 Identification Duration 50s l Extra Duration 15s Usage Hide Figure 123 Upper items of the identification settings Settings and Commands Specify the duration of data acquisition for the nuclide identification Allot more time to the identification measurement if e you want to identify a weak source e you are at a place with high background radiation e you want to identify a mixture of radionuclides e you want to identify a shielded source You can specify the durations Dynamic or from 1s to 999s 16 m 39 s bx If you specify a duration of Dynamic the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will collect data un til 4800 gamma counts have been registered This may take a while especially if the
146. esetting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can be reset by performing a normal shut down start up cycle All your custom settings remain unchanged by this procedure To revert the instrument to the factory defaults use Reset Factory Settings 6 15 p 132 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 3 To reset the FLIR identiFINDER R300 1 Shut down the instrument 2 6 p 64 Em Should a reset be necessary because the instrument does not react to your input any more you might have to use the forced shut down procedure described in section 2 6 p 64 2 Start up the instrument 2 5 p 62 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 3 Field Operating Guide Chapter 3 Field Operating Guide This chapter provides a guide to the basic operating procedures necessary to survey an object and generate the analyzed results for the survey of that object 9 In many cases your organization or institution will have its own Standard Operating Proce dure SOP In such a case you should refer to that SOP A typical application of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is the survey of objects for radioactive radia tion and to document the results of the survey This process involves these fundamental steps 1 Turn on and check the instrument see 3 1 p 70 2 Observe the dose rate in your environment to detect gamma radiation see 3 2 p
147. esults of a single measurement stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database for example an identification measurement Figure 46 p 57 The main contents vary with the type of shown records Several buttons are available for navigation and housekeeping 5 Previous Proceed to the previous record of the same type Return to the table of records of the same type Proceed to the next record of the same type Spectrum If the record contains a spectrum you can hover above the chart to get details of the pointed part shown Not available on touch driven devices without pointer GPS Coordinates If GPS coordinates were stored with a record they are shown in an additional section of the details page Figure 47 p 58 Send the GPS coordinates stored with the record to the GeoHack page on the Wikimedia Toolserver a free service of Wikimedia Deutschland e V Internet access required The service links to international servers of maps satellite images aerial photographs etc which cover the coordinates saved with your record Download the shown record to the computer The name of the downloaded zip archive begins with the serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 followed by the type and the reference number ofthe record for example 103156000000 Identification 4 11 zip Send the record to the configured see 6 24 p 149 and 8 6 2 p 192 reachback server see 9 p 219 Serial Number 103156000000 nanoRaider
148. etected by observing their interaction with matter Some materials emit visible light when hit by gamma rays Scintillator some gases are ionized and conduct electricity Geiger M ller Tube or some semiconductors Semiconductor Radiation Detector change electric conductivity when exposed to gamma radiation 4 Germanium D Glossary Geiger M ller Tube GM Tube A device to detect Ionizing Radiation consisting of a tube filled with low pressure noble and halogene gas in a strong electric field Incident radiation produces Ions which can be mea sured as electric current between the electrodes Germanium Ge A substance used in high precision Semiconductor Radiation Detectors for Gamma Radi ation Global Positioning System GPS A constellation of satellites sending microwave signals which enable receivers to determine the time their location speed and direction Also known as Navstar Global Positioning System GM Tube Geiger M ller Tube GMT Greenwich Mean Time GPS Global Positioning System Gray Gy The gray is the SI derived unit of Absorbed Dose due to 7Ionizing Radiation One gray is the absorption of one joule of energy in the form of ionizing radiation by one kilogram of matter 2 1 Gy 1 Ed y kg s For Gamma Radiation these are the same base units as the Sievert To avoid confusion do no not use J kg but always Gy for the absorbed dose and Sv for the Equiv
149. ever is predictable and usually given as Half Life Also known as Disintegration Radioactive Decay Deutsches Institut f r Normung DIN The German national organization for standardization represents Germany in the ISO DHS Department of Homeland Security USA Dial Up Networking DUN A Bluetooth communications profile to access the Internet or other dial up services DIN Deutsches Institut f r Normung Dirty Bomb Radiological Dispersion Device Disintegration 7 Decay DNDO Domestic Nuclear Detection Office of the DHS USA Dose A measure of the Tonizing Radiation energy transfer to for example tissue 7 Sievert Dose Rate The quotient of Dose given in Sievert and time DT Dead Time DUN Dial Up Networking Electromagnetic Radiation Self propagating waves comprising electric and magnetic field components The Spectrum ranges from low frequent radio waves longer waves microwaves visible light ultraviolet radiation X rays up to high frequent Gamma Radiation shorter waves Electron A subatomic particle with a negative electric charge counterpart of the Positron It is emit ted as Beta Radiation Electron Volt eV The electron volt is a non SI unit of energy Joule employed in radiation physics It is equal to the amount of kinetic energy gained by a single unbound electron when it accelerates through an electrostatic potential difference of one volt 1eV 1 602177 x 10 1 D Gloss
150. evices and a host con troller usually a personal computer UTC Coordinated Universal Time Weapons Grade Plutonium WGPu A mixture of Pu 4 Pu and other Isotopes which contains less than 7 96 27 Pu Due to its reduced amount of the spontaneous fission source Pu the risk of a premature chain reac tion start is decreased so that this blend of Plutonium is used for the weapon head assemblies Further grades are 7Fuel Grade Plutonium and Reactor Grade Plutonium WGPu Weapons Grade Plutonium WGS84 World Geodetic System World Geodetic System WGS84 A standard for use in cartography geodesy and navigation comprising a coordinate system for the Earth a reference surface for raw altitude data and a geoid defining the nominal sea level The WGS release of 1984 with later revisions is used by Global Positioning System FLIR Detection XML Extensible Markup Language A gratis open standard for encoding arbitrary data with their structure in textual files Z Atomic Number identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 re Index key function 35 41 42 44 118 122 125 127 128 137 138 143 149 150 153 155 159 164 o Alarm setting 163 164 key function 35 38 39 41 42 44 118 122 125 127 128 137 138 143 149 150 153 155 159 164 12 Hour Clock 267 24 Hour Clock 267 30s key function 95 setting 155 A A 268 a Particle 268 a Radi
151. face e Wireless communication via Bluetooth for reachback e Web interface for monitoring and configuration of the instrument without additional PC soft Ware and many more See A 1 p 237 for the complete specifications 1 5 Unpacking and Identifying Accessories The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is available in several variants see A 1 p 237 which are shipped with their accessories Figure 1 p 21 in a sturdy case Figure Z p 22 A FLIR identiFINDER R300 instrument with rubber boot and wrist strap string Wrist Strap Lanyard C Holster 1 Welcome Figure 1 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 with accessories D Wall power adapter with USB A receptacle B International adapters for power adapter US Euro UK P Car power adapter with USB A receptacle G Mini USB B to USB A cable for connection to local computer or power adapter USB 2 0 H CD ROM with manual and drivers D Pelican case Review the parts and components received In the event that a component cannot be located con tact the appropriate support organization see Chapter B 4 p 257 A name plate Figure 3 p 23 is attached to the rear side of the instrument It lists the type of instrument the serial number and other important information You might want to remember the serial number It is sometimes used to identify the FLIR identiFINDER R300 in a computer network After the initial charge the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is ready for use
152. ge Microsoft Windows CE Operating System TCP IP emulated via USB DHCP server included subnet configurable ULA routing prefix fde6 e89e 44bc 48 with device specific subnet ANSI N42 42 and spc files compatible with third party analysis software applications such as GADRAS Cambio or PeakEasy ANSI N42 42 data via HTTP AC in 100 V 230 V 50 Hz 60 Hz DC out 5 V 2A DC in 12 V 24 V DC out 5V 2A Mini USB B USB A 1 83 m 6 00 ft 60 g 2 12 oz Included FLIR Detection continuation ANSI N42 48 Performance Requirements for Spectroscopic Personal Radiation Detectors SPRDs for Homeland Security IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures IP Code EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Regulations concerning electromagnetic compatibility FCC Part 15 Regulations concerning electromagnetic M imi ANSI N42 42 2006 Data format standard for radiation detectors PONSE e identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 A Info Pool A 2 Detector Positions Detector Crystale y Optional He Tube Neutrons Figure 238 Position of the detector centers of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 7 A 3 Optimum Illumination of Detector Crystals A 3 Optimum Illumination of Detector Crystals Source Figure 239 Optimal dose rate calculation needs a uniform illumination of the three detector crystals for which the source to detector distance should be at least 15 cm 6 in drawn
153. ge 6 25 p 150 2 Connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to the computer with the included cable The mass storage device shows up on your computer after a few moments Figure 183 p 170 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 hard drive is write protected that is you cannot modify or add any data A z 4 S y DN Computer Y 4 SACARLE P Organize v AutoPlay Properties System properties Uninstall or change a program YY Favorites 4 Hard Disk Drives 2 RE Desktop Jg Downloads Recent Places 4 Libraries Documents J Music i Pictures B Videos E Computer i Network Local Disk C nanoRaider ZH 103386000000 E 4 Devices with Removable Storage 1 nanoRaider ZH 103386000000 E Space used eee Total size 59 4 MB Local Disk Space free 43 5 MB File system FAT Figure 183 FLIR identiFINDER R300 mounted as mass storage device on a computer running Microsoft Windows 7 gt To unmount the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as USB mass storage 1 Follow the standard procedure for unmounting mass storage devices as recommended by your operating system Please refer to the manual or help system that came with your oper ating system for details 2 Unplug the connection cable 3 Press on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to return from USB mass storage mode to normal operation see 6 25 p 150 7 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer 1 3 Preparing the USB Network Connection on a
154. gen 17 Mrz 14 28 4 2 Bildschirm Beleuchtung 10 n Dimmen nach 15s Chosen Item Sprache Deutsch Changed Value Accepted Tastenfunktionen Normal Runter Bearbeiten Down Select Figure 22 Changing Values Changed setting accepted Pressing D for a moment also cancels editing A Do not press O for too long That would power down your FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 2 4 Changing Composite Values Some values are combinations of several components Calendar dates for example have year month and day components or clock settings have hour and minute components Several commands Figure 12 p 35 are available if you see 2 2 3 p 37 such values for editing Always one of the value s components is selected Figure 23 p 40 that is editing com mands are applied to this component pu Uu 15 04 Clock Time Zone GMT 08 00 87103 FAUBEI Mar 17 Selected Entry Field Selected Component Time 15 04 Pacific Time US Canada Increase Component Figure 23 Changing Combined Values Changing the selected component Reveal More Commands 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 You increase the component with o and decrease it with o In the example shown here you edit the year of the date since it is the selected component Now you need commands to select the other components of the value see 2 2 1 p 35 You can reveal them with mapped to B Figure 24 p 41 m Settings 17 Mar 15 18 2
155. h 232 270 Bluetooth command 141 Bluetooth Device Name setting 145 Bluetooth Periphery command 104 Bluetooth SPP Settings command 104 Bluetooth SPP Settings 4 web page 180 Bluetooth SPP Settings 4 web section 180 Bluetooth SPP Status command 104 Bluetooth SPP 4 menu 104 Bq 270 Bulk Download web page 180 C C2H4 4 270 C Hg0 270 Cadmium Zinc Telluride CZT CdZnTe 270 Calibration 270 Calibration command 103 115 Calibration key function 114 Cancel key function 35 39 41 43 46 47 95 111 118 122 125 127 129 133 134 137 138 143 149 150 153 155 159 164 CBRNE 271 CdZnTe 271 Cesium Lithium Yttrium Chloride CLYC Cs gt LiYCl Ce 271 Change key function 128 Change device key function 224 Change Device setting 145 Change Password menu 104 Channel key function 114 Chemical Element 271 Choose key function 138 Clear key function 108 111 116 129 Clear Markers key function 110 Clear Password command 104 129 Clock 29 125 128 186 Clock web section 180 Clock Settings command 103 104 125 CLYC 271 Co 60 key function 116 Colors setting 123 Commands Advanced Menu 103 Alarm Indicators 105 160 Automated Mode Settings 104 135 Bluetooth 141 Bluetooth Periphery 4 104 Bluetooth SPP Settings 4 104 Bluetooth SPP Status 104 Calibration 103 115 Clear Password 104 129 Clock Settings 103 104 125
156. h Figure 137 p 130 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 ta 6 14 Show Status P4 IIR d Ri 110 Confirmation 21 Mar 17 50 Confirmation After you have cleared the password no authentication will be required to enter the advanced mode Are you sure Figure 137 Removing the password 6 14 Show Status Options Menu p 103 More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Maintenance p 104 gt Show Status ES Home p 179 Info p 181 System p 181 LOS Settings p 180 GPS and Clock p 186 gt GPS p 186 This command displays various status and version information for your FLIR identiFINDER R300 on several pages Figures 138 139 p 131 131 Settings and Commands 2 o Step through the status pages System Various information about your FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 138 p 131 Serial Number The serial number of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 Available Memory The capacity remaining to store spectra alarms screenshots etc You can free memory by erasing all or some of the data see 6 16 p 133 if neces sary Screenshots The number of screen shots saved in memory IP Address The IP address of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 You need this address to communicate with the instrument from a computer see 6 26 p 152 BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference M Status Information 22 Mar 0
157. he FLIR identiFINDER R300 discoverable over Bluetooth for the Discovery timeout period SPP PIN displays the current PIN for connecting to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 via Bluetooth SPP mode The PIN may be edited If Enable discovery mode after disconnect is set to Off then discovery of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 via Bluetooth will be disabled after a connection is terminated To transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 click Save You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Bluetooth SPP p 104 gt Bluetooth SPP Status p 141 Bluetooth SPP Settings p 142 8 8 Nuclides Web Page E Settings p 180 gt Nuclides This web page Figure 207 p 194 lets you inspect and change nuclide data pu I identiFINDE nw 8 9 Backup Web Page Serial Number 103156000000 nanoRaider Info z Settings z Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Nuclides 2E Nuclides Visibility Usage Severity Y Ag 110m Innocent Y Am 241 Threatening Y Annihilation Innocent 5 9 wv Ba 133 Y U 232 or Th 232 Jv U 233 Threatening 4X U mix hreatening e Y Xe 133 Figure 207 Nuclide Settings web page You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details abo
158. he FLIR identiFINDER R300 with operating elements Display LEDs and keys 2 123 99 394 9 9 9 4 99 999994 karaA ee ee 28 8 Anatomy of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 display llle 29 Signals of the status LED amp evo komo m om ok okom 9 EA 31 10 Right handed operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with normal key assignments 33 11 Left handed operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with reverse key key assigments 34 12 Skipping commands for value editing i452 nooo 35 13 Choosing from a menu Initial state withoutchosenitem 35 14 Choosing from a menu Choosing the next item with Down 36 15 Choosing from a menu Choosing other items with Down 36 16 Choosing from a menu After executing the command with Select 37 17 Choosing from a menu Scrolling in long MENOS lt ote ae eee ee X mox ox 37 18 Changing Values Choosing the setting uuu so acca dae eeeeceenes eee uns 38 19 Changing Values Selected entry field uon sow wo 999m ESESESE CEC E XSE E 3 x om Xo 38 20 Changing Values Changed entry field o a 39 21 Changing Values Revealing more commands rr 39 22 Changing Values Changed setting accepted cl 0 40 23 Changing Combined Values Changing the selected component 40 24 Changing Combined Values Selecting COMPpONeNtS o 41 25 Changing
159. he command mapped to the O key The chosen item is decorated by a distinct color and symbols Figure 14 p 36 z MO More Options 17 Mar 11 27 E More Options Chosen Item Choose Items with Down Down Select Figure 14 Choosing from a menu Choosing the next item with Down Press repeatedly to choose other menu items Figure 15 p 36 O0 More Options 17 Mar 11 50 EA Chosen Item Choose Items with Down Down Select Figure 15 Choosing from a menu Choosing other items with Down After reaching the bottom of the menu Figure 15 p 36 no item will be chosen on the next press of 0 and a becomes available Once you have chosen the item you are interested in you can the item with Q This exe cutes the chosen command which in our example opens the Advanced Options menu Figure 16 p 37 BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Return to Superior Screen Down Figure 16 Choosing from a menu After executing the command with Select 2 2 2 1 Scrolling in Menus Some menus offer more options than the five fitting on the screen This is indicated by scroll bars along the vertical screen edges Figure 17 p 37 A position marker indicates the position of the chosen item relative to the complete list of items Arrows at the upper and lower visible item indicate whether more items are available in that direc tion respectively If you approach
160. he screen TD Emder SA Peep Threshold LI eaha Count Rate Exceeded the 2i JS E di a 7 eee Beep Threshold Count Rate History Current Neutron Rate Current Dose Rate 0 196 SV h N 0 000 cps Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Identity Options Figure 69 Finder mode Continuous measurement You can change the sensitivity of the beeper see 6 30 p 157 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 3 Field Operating Guide 3 4 Identifying a Radiation Source After you have detected a radiation source by surveying the ambient dose rate 3 2 p 70 or by locating its position 3 3 p 73 you can use the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s Identification Mode 4 3 p 90 to find out the nuclide the radiation is originating from The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can identify and report a number of nuclides by analyzing the radia tion spectrum they emit You can inspect the library of these nuclides in appendix C p 259 or with less detail in the instrument itself by checking the nuclide visibility under gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Identification Options p 103 gt Nuclide Visibility p 118 Em Depending on your instrument s settings you might have to enter a password to access the list 2 2 7 p 46 3 To identify radionuclides 1 If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 runs in Dose Rate Mode Figure 64 p 71 and Finder Mode is enabled then
161. he shut down command X Store your FLIR identiFINDER R300 in its case while not in use 4 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes Chapter 4 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s essential measuring modes for day to day procedures Dose Rate Mode Observe the ambient radiation see 4 1 p 86 Finder Mode Locate radiation sources see 4 2 p 88 Identification Mode Identify radiating nuclides see 4 3 p 90 Automated Mode Have the unattended instrument identify radiating nuclides at predefined time intervals see 4 4 p 93 Remotely Controlled Spectrum Acquisition Acquire spectra via the web interface see 4 5 p 95 8 16 p 209 The alarms overriding all other modes and commands are detailed in Chapter 5 p 97 4 1 Dose Rate Mode TID Finder TE Mar 11 14 ET 0 196 uSv h N 0 000 ETE Identify Options TI Dose Rate 18Mar 09 40 Dose Rate 18 Mar 09 UE T Identification 24Mar 16 09 T Identification 24 Mar 16 09 24 Mar 16 09 EU Dose Rate Point unit to source O END EN a 4 294 uSv h 0 296 DT 5 395 18s of 50s 414cps a uSv h 0 017 cps Neutrons Keep distance to source Figure 85 Cycling the manual modes Dose Rate Finder and Identification IE NENNT Dose Rate Point unit to source O END am lt i gt 4 294 uSv h 0 296 DT 5 395 18s of 50s 414cps a uSv h 0 017 cps Neutrons Keep distance
162. hot Bluetooth Periphery 17 Sep 12 14 Re 5D1000v2 0 8 14 58C Down Figure 230 Detected SD1000 device entry chosen 8 Choose the Choose 1234 PIN option Figure 231 p 226 then press to pair identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 rr a 10 1 Pairing the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Satellite Phone O0 Bluetooth Periphery 30 Mar 11 22 E Generate Random PIN Use 0000 Use 1234 Figure 231 Selecting a PIN for the pairing of Bluetooth devices 9 An information screen Figure 232 p 226 will be shown for a short time while pairing is in progress __ Bluetooth Periphery 17Sep 12 15 0 Information Pairing is in progress Check your device if further steps are needed The PIN is 1234 Cancel Figure 232 Bluetooth Periphery Information Pairing is in progress A If pairing fails then an error message Figure 233 p 226 will be displayed Make sure the satellite phone and SD1000 are powered on correctly configured and still within range of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 then try again Information An error occurred while pairing with Jane s Mobile Figure 233 Pairing to a Bluetooth device failed 10 After a successful pairing the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will display information about the paired Bluetooth device in the Device Details screen Figure 234 p 227 Verify that the FLIR identiFINDER R300 has established the Connection as Dial Up Network as shown in M
163. hyl Methacrylate Activity The number of disintegrations of an excited state in a Nucleus per duration given in 7 Becquerel Activity Concentration Specific Activity Adjustment Calibration Alarm An audible visual or other signal activated when an instrument reading or response exceeds a preset value or falls outside of a preset range Alpha Particle Two Protons and two Neutrons strongly bound together It is the Nucleus of the helium atom 2He Alpha a particles are commonly emitted during the Decay of heavy Nuclei Also known as Particle Alpha Radiation A Particle Radiation of Alpha Particles Alpha radiation has a short range in matter due to its positive charge and heavy mass being relatively easy to shield for example by a sheet of paper Figure 245 p 283 However it poses a great health hazard when alpha radiators are ingested by organisms D Glossary Also known as Radiation American National Standards Institute ANSI An organization that oversees the development of voluntary consensus standards for prod ucts services processes systems and personnel in the USA ANSI American National Standards Institute ANSI N42 42 An XML based data format standard for radiation detectors used for homeland security Sometimes a version is specified with the year of release for example ANSI N42 42 2006 ANSI N42 42 formatted files can be processed and analyzed with third party software
164. ify values between 2 and 500 o Alarm The state of notifications on unusual increase of neutrons detected see 5 3 p 101 You can specify On or Off CD D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference 6 36 Current Alarm State gt Options Menu p 103 Alarm Options p 105 Current Alarm State This screen Figure 178 p 165 is identical to the alarm screen always shown when a warning or an alarm is raised compare 5 p 97 No Alarms Dose 1 690 uSv Current Values Dose Rate 0 080 uSv h N eutr ons 0 01 cps Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Mute Figure 178 Current Alarm State Settings and Commands Switch off the beeper and vibrator for the current alarm if any The next alarm if any reac tivates sound and vibration Return to the superior menu identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 7 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer Chapter 7 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can be connected to a computer via Universal Serial Bus USB The connection between the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and the computer serves two purposes Energy Supply The computer provides e
165. ime Indicator Preset Indicator Remaining Acquisition Duration amp PRRI 104 0s Ge 160250 0 072 uSv h DT 0 6 Skip Stop Figure 111 Acquiring spectrum data while the duration is preset e You switch the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to Identification Mode see 4 3 p 90 This dis cards the current spectrum and loads the spectrum from the identification process into the spectrum viewer e You the spectrum view Return to the superior menu A If you try to exit during data acquisition you will be asked to confirm the command because the acquisition will stop Spectrum Cursor You can place a cursor for detailed inspection along the spectrum s horizontal axis The cur sor position is represented on screen by a vertical line with a down pointing triangle on top Figure 112 p 109 The number of counts at the cursor s position is shown above the triangle together with the position as channel number Figure 112 p 109 or energy Figure 113 p 110 BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference Em The vertical scaling is adjusted to make best use of the available screen height If you zoom in see below this may cause vertical rescaling if you move the cursor between sections with high peaks or noise End Coordinate of Horizontal Axis Otart Coordinate of Horizontal Axis tie 7 Spectrum 29 Mar 15 16 414 counts ch 202 3072 keV a Values at Cursor Position
166. ing of these messages shall be UTF 8 and shall not include a byte order marker BOM Y The NUL character is represented in this document s example listings in C style notation as XO It is a single standard byte with the character value of zero For the purposes of this specification any number of NUL 10 bytes contained within the XML mes sage is illegal since NUL is used as the message delimiter after the completed XML Every message shall be terminated with the NUL character Y XML tags are case sensitive EP N O1 A 6 Bluetooth Serial Port Profile SPP Communication Overview Only one command should be sent before receiving a response If no response is received after 15 seconds it can be assumed the command was lost or the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is in an unre sponsive state LS The example listings use colored text and other font effects for emphasis This is not part of the XML message Line breaks and indentation are also for ease of reading and are not required The XML messages make extensive use of AttributeName AttributeValue pairs Each Attribute Name in the defined messages is fixed and will be shown verbatim in the example listings However there is typically more than one possible value for an AttributeValue Listings will some times show placeholder text for an AttributeValue in blue similar to PlaceholderText In actual usage placeholder text will be replaced with the appropriat
167. ion View a detail spectrum to check the calibration Please refer to 6 3 p 115 for details Specify the type of display for the duration of data acquisition You can specify real or live time display The current setting is shown below the chart Fig ure 110 p 107 No matter what you specify here the dead time DT is always shown as a percentage of the real time 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference Save the spectrum and go to UNA see 6 22 p 140 avoiding the detour around the normal options menu hierarchy The current spectrum will be already chosen for sending Go to the see 6 8 p 121 avoiding the detour around the normal options menu hi erarchy 6 3 Calibration Options Menu p 103 More Options p 103 gt Spectrum p 106 gt Calibration The calibration check screen Figure 122 p 116 shows a zoomed spectrum see 6 2 p 106 of a certain peak and some parameters describing the peak The center of the horizontal axis is posi tioned at the theoretical peak position and the vertical axis is scaled logarithmically Upon entering this screen a peak of Cs is shown You can choose other nuclides from a list of nuclides commonly used for calibration Table 1 p 115 Table 1 Typical Calibration Peaks Nuclide Peak keV CS 661 65 40K 1460 8 232 Th 2615 22Na ANNH 511 Annihilation radiation also originates from other sources like 1C 13n 150 18F 9963 or 82Rb Mn 834 838 C
168. ionally the identification results including the spec trum and if required and available the GPS coordinates are automatically saved in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database Identification 24 Mar 16 38 2 E Nuclide Usage Nuclide Name j jJ N ucl ides Ce see p 259 Identification 9 E u 1 5 2 IND D Nuclide Severity Confidence Innocent Suspi O bad cious Threatening 10 excellent see p 259 Reference Number of the Saved Data Identification saved as NO 77 Continue Figure 72 Identification results E Nuclides the identification algorithm did not recognize or those recognized but having their visibility suppressed see 6 5 p 118 are reported as Unknown You can specify whether confidence usage or severity are shown see 6 4 p 116 5 If necessary you can acquire more spectrum data to improve the identification by pressing e identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 3 Field Operating Guide The FLIR identiFINDER R300 will acquire more data for the preset extra duration see 6 4 p 116 6 Youcan inspectthe spectrum acquired for the identification by pressing and Figure 73 p 77 Please refer to 6 2 p 106 for options and commands for spectrum viewing Spectrum 24 EA 51 counts 120 kev RI 1 1 8s Gc 4853 0 041 uSv h DI 0 696 Nc 0 Skip Cursor Figure 73 Spectrum the identification is based upon 35 Communicate with a Local Com
169. ions of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 alarms in chapter 5 p 97 A detailed reference on all the commands is given in chapter 6 p 103 which you should read to know about all the features and possibilities in case you need them Chapter 7 p 167 explains how to setup the connection of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a local computer The web interface for monitoring configuring and transferring data is detailed in chapter 8 p 179 1 Welcome The setup for sending data to a remote server reachback is explained in chapter 9 p 219 Chapter 11 p 229 details the power supply for the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The appendix comprises specification data Appendix A 1 p 237 maintenance information Ap pendix B p 255 information about the nuclides the FLIR identiFINDER R300 can identify Ap pendix C p 259 a glossary of terms and abbreviations Appendix D p 267 and finally an index p 291 4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is available in several variants see A 1 p 237 for detailed spec ifications All variants share almost identical operating procedures and are covered in this manual The few places where a feature of a certain variant differs from the main stream are marked accordingly in the text 1 4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 instrument engineered and manufactured by FLIR Detection is a dig ital self contained battery powered instrument that provides the power of advanced spectroscopy in
170. ith normal key assignments 2 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys in Dose Rate E 0 020 sn 0 000 cps Neutrons FLIR nanoRaider ES 4 Figure 11 Left handed operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with reverse key key assigments 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 21 Using Command Lists Most features of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 offer more commands than you could immediately reach with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s limited number of keys In these cases the special command is permanently mapped to 0 and you can use it to cycle the available commands If you reach the end of the list Q cycles to the start of the list For example the commands to edit values are o ED GI C and 2 2 3 p 37 You can swap these commands with Figure 12 p 35 e ec er 6 Figure 12 Skipping commands for value editing 2 2 2 Choosing from Menus Often you have to choose an operation from a menu like for example the More Options menu shown in Figure 13 p 35 mug More Options 17 Mar 11 18 More Options Menu Items Finder Settings Dose Rate Settings Down Exit Key Descriptions Figure 13 Choosing from a menu Initial state without chosen item identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN 2 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys While no item is chosen you can press C to to the superior screen You can choose items from the menu with t
171. ition 96 100 Dose rate display with alarmindication lll 98 101 Alarm display Dose rate warning uuweweseesseesszy2p523 5s9 25235443445 99 102 Alarm display Dose rate alarm na naaa a 99 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 List of Figures FLIR Detection 103 Gamma alarms as announced by the red LED beeper and vibrator 100 104 Alarm display Neutron alarm 2 234454 55655666 b9 0 2 e 2 Ree ee K EK EE 101 105 Neutron incidents as announced by the blue LED beeper and vibrator 101 106 Dose rate display with o notification a 102 107 Hierarchy of the FLIR identiFINDERR300 menu 105 108 Anatomy ofthe spectrum display 0 0 0 a 106 109 Spectrum information around the Chart 0 00 ce eee ee ee ee 107 110 Acquiring spectrum data sa 9X9 9 e ee bee awe DR Ge 8 UR DR CR CR OR Ow wo 107 111 Acquiring spectrum data while the duration iS preset 108 112 Spectrum with cursor atlocal peak 109 113 ROI Specification Moving the cursor a 110 114 ROI Specification Marking the first ROT boundary o 110 115 ROI Specification Marking the second ROI boundary 111 116 Spectrum Scale Complete spectrum visible 111 117 Spectrum Scale First half of spectrum visible
172. itron extermi nation caused by the beta decay It has a fixed energy of 511 keV and is caused by all beta radiators Common examples are F used for medical applications or Na which also emits gamma radiation O Naturally occurring radioactive material The ubiquitous background radiation is emitted from a variety of mostly natural and some artificial sources such as unstable nuclides contained in most chemical elements comprising the lithosphere bio sphere and atmosphere cosmic radiation from outer space and applications of nuclear technology for weapons power plants and medicine The background recorded by an instrument is of course spoiled by non natural sources present while measuring the back ground aD Special nuclear material Neutron radiation can have different origins the most common types are spontaneous fission sources e g 7 Cf and alpha emitters packaged in a low Z elemental matrix e g Americium Beryllium Americium Lithium or Plutonium Beryllium Both types have a wide range of applications including industrial and medical fields Neu trons can also occur in the vicinity of nuclear power plants driven by neutrons that collide with the fission material typically using one of the above sources A Unknown nuclear material An unknown source of radiation Further investigations are neces sary T Industrially used material Most commonly used in smoke detectors and to measure levels of toxic lead in p
173. ive Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration GPS and Clock GPS Save gt GPS Coordinates Look Up with GeoHack EJ Clock Time Zone GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Current Time nanoRaider ZH Time 2013 08 29 17 41 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 203 The GPS and Clock settings web page Look Up with GeoHack Sends the shown GPS coordinates to the GeoHack page on the Wikimedia Toolserver a free service of Wikimedia Deutschland e V Internet access re quired The service links to international servers of maps satellite images aerial pho tographs etc which cover the coordinates saved with your record identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 5 Alarm Web Page Clock This web page section Figure 203 p 187 lets you inspect and edit settings for the clock of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 E Settings p 180 gt GPS and Clock p 186 gt Clock gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt General Options p 104 gt Clock Settings p 125 Select your time zone from the list built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Time zones are specified as offset from UTC GMT Periods for daylight savings time however might be different for the same offset from UTC in various regions To have the FLIR identiFINDER R300 consider the correct day light savings time for your time zone make sure to check the region info
174. ivity p 190 gt Download Options p 192 This screen Figure 169 p 155 lists several file formats available for transferring recorded data from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a connected computer 8 p 179 You can accelerate the downloads by excluding file types not needed in your workflow For example the formats n42 Spc and spe usually contain the same information in different formats Em Some file formats are not available for all types of data Settings and Commands n42 2012 Files formatted according to the 2012 edition of the ANSI N42 42 Standard MEE identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference p Download Settings n42 2012 Yes n42 2006 Yes spc Yes spe Yes Figure 169 Download settings n42 2006 Files formatted according to the 2006 edition of the ANSI N42 42 Standard Other file formats D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details 000 Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 29 Gamma Neutron Counters gt Options Menu p 103 gt Gamma Neutron Counters This command displays the state of various counters Figure 170 p 156 If your variant is equipped with a neutron detector its results will be shown as well Figure 171 p 156 E The counters for gamma and neutrons if available are reset when you switch on the FLIR identiFINDER R3
175. k usually the most prominent line at 661 65 keV of Cs Because there are various ways to judge a peak width it is a convention to use the Full Width at Half Maximum RGPu Reactor Grade Plutonium RID Radionuclide Identifying Device RNDIS Remote Network Driver Interface Specification ROI Region of Interest D Glossary R ntgen Equivalent in Man rem The r ntgen equivalent in man is an old unit of radiation Dose Sievert 100 rem 15v The continued use of remis strongly discouraged by the U S National Institute of Standards and Technology RT Real Time Scintillation Counter A device to measure Ionizing Radiation by amplifying the light emitted from a Scintillator with a Photo Multiplier Tube and quantifying the result Scintillator A material emitting a flash of light when it absorbs Ionizing Radiation Semiconductor Radiation Detector A semiconductor for example Germanium or Cadmium Zinc Telluride placed between two electrodes registering electric pulses resulting from the travel of free electrons pro duced by incident Gamma Radiation The number of free electrons is proportional to the radiation s energy SI Systeme International d Unit s A metric and decimal system of units standardized by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures International Bureau of Weights and Measures Also known as International System of Units SI Prefixes A Unit Prefi
176. k Ridge TN 37830 USA T 1 865 220 8700 F 1 865 220 7187 radiation support flir com detectionsupport com radiation Service Europe Africa Middle East FLIR Detection Inc Luxemburgstraat 2 2321 Meer Belgium T 32 0 3665 5106 F 32 0 3303 5624 radiation support flir com detectionsupport com radiation 2014 3 FLIR Radiation Figure 43 Visible menu hierarchy on a web page with narrow layout identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 Page Header Main Page Area Page Footer 2 4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server nanoRaider Info t Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Resources gt Info Model nanoRaider ZH Serial Number 103156000000 Software Version 2014 3 Available Memory 94 Spectroscopic Detector One CdZnTe 15x13x5 Dose Rate Detector Two additional CdZnTe 15x13x5 Neutron Detector He tube 3He3 608 15NS Figure 44 Single submenu on a web page with wide layout identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 4 2 Tables on Web Pages Some web pages e g Figure 45 p 55 show tables of stored records available for download from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer nanoRaider Home 32 Settings t Multi Page Table Alarms o za oj nati Column Titles with pen Sorting Buttons i EOT NET m ero o i s 41214 Dole Nam Mino 1 h
177. l data files have the same names as if they were downloaded individually danti CININED ponnia EE identiFINDER R300 ei 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server 1 103156000000 Bulk Download 2 Alarms 3 Alarms txt 4 Identifications 5 ANSI N42 42 2006 6 Identification 1002 ANSI N42 42 2006 n42 T Identification 1003 ANSI N42 42 2006 n42 8 ANSI N42 42 2012 9 Identification 1002 ANSI N42 42 2012 n42 10 Identification 1003 ANSI N42 42 2012 n42 11 Spc 12 Identification 1002 Measurement spc 13 Identification 1003 Measurement spc 14 Spe 15 Identification 1002 Measurement spe 16 Identification 1003 Measurement spe 1T Screenshots 18 IdentifyScreen D20121227 T224932 00 00 png 19 DoseRateScreen D20121227 T224900 00 00 png 20 Spectra 21 ANSI N42 42 2006 22 Spectrum 1010 ANSI N42 42 2006 n42 23 Spectrum 1014 ANSI N42 42 2006 n42 24 ANSI N42 42 2012 25 Spectrum 1010 ANSI N42 42 2012 n42 26 Spectrum 1014 ANSI N42 42 2012 n42 27 Spc 28 Spectrum 1010 Measurement spc 29 Spectrum 1014 Measurement spc 30 spe 31 Spectrum 1010 Measurement spe 32 Spectrum 1014 Measurement spe 8 11 Identifications Web Page ca Data p 180 gt Identifications This web page Figure 210 p 200 tabulates the identification results stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database For the navigation of tables refer to section 2 4 2 p 55 The table shows several columns for every record N The arbi
178. l formats The file names comprise the type of data and the reference number of the record Identification 4711 ANSI N42 42 2006 n42 An XML file according to ANSI N42 42 2006 p 269 containing instrument information the identification result and the measured spectrum Identification 4711 ANSI N42 42 2012 n42 An XML file according to ANSI N42 42 2012 p 269 containing instrument information the identification result and the measured spectrum Identification 4711 Measurement spc A text file containing instrument information the identification result and the measured Spectrum Identification 4711 Measurement spe A text file containing instrument information the identification result and the measured Spectrum 8 12 Spectra Web Page m a Data p 180 Spectra This web page Figure 212 p 203 tabulates the spectra stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database For the navigation of tables refer to section 2 4 2 p 55 The table shows several columns for every record N The arbitrary reference number of the record Start Time The beginning of data acquisition of the spectrum Saved on The date and time of storage of the record Real Time The real time of data acquisition of the spectrum Open a page showing details see 8 12 1 p 203 ofthe record Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Spectra 2013 1 FLIR Radiation 8 12 1 Settings Data Live Screen
179. lay for example during an identification measurement 4 3 p 90 E The backlight of the screen will be dimmed after the timeout you specified 6 9 p 122 Fa The backlight of the screen will be dimmed after the timeout you specified 6 9 p 122 and the application software will power down half a minute later XK This mode is not used while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is powered by an external power source You can wake up a sleeping system by pressing a key CENTER Variable Main Display The contents of this area vary with the current operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 It shows for example status information after power up Figure 55 p 63 menus to choose commands from Figure 13 p 35 the strength of the observed gamma radiation Figure 87 p 86 or corresponding alarms Figure 101 p 99 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 BOTTOM Key Descriptions The fields in this bar name the current function of each of the operating keys 00 2 1 1 Status LEDs Several LEDs Figure 5 p 26 indicate various status information 9 Red labeled G short for Gamma indicates dose and dose rate alarms Q Blue labeled N short for Neutron indicates neutron counts and alarms Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector 9 Green indicates the power status Figure 9 p 31 clock Figure 9 Signals of the status LED 30 You can switch off the red and blue LEDs 6 32 p 160
180. le the FLIR identiFINDER R300 searches for Bluetooth devices sup porting the required protocol Figure 228 p 224 ID Bluetooth Periphery 23 Mar 15 27 8 Searching Searching for bluetooth devices in range If your device does not show up check that it is configured correctly Cancel Figure 228 Searching for Bluetooth devices EE M identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 10 Connecting via Satellite Phone AN If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is unable to detect any compatible Bluetooth devices it will report Search Failed Figure 228 p 224 Ensure the SD1000 LED is still flash ing in a triple flash pattern and that the devices are within the maximum range If the devices are more than a few meters apart then move them closer if possible Select to restart the search for discoverable Bluetooth devices and repeat this step O0 Bluetooth Periphery 23 Mar 15 50 Search failed No suitable Bluetooth device found Do you want to search again Search Cancel Figure 229 No Bluetooth devices detected 7 Once the Search completes with at least one compatible Bluetooth device selected it will report the identification screen of all detected devices Figure 230 p 225 Choose the SIUE device from the list Figure 230 p 225 with then press to pair E The device names are listed exactly as received from the detected devices and the name of the SD1000 may differ from what is shown in the screens
181. mately 400 mA Before connecting to a computer please make sure the USB outlet of the computer complies with this requirement This might not be the case with some laptops netbooks or similar battery powered devices While the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is connected to an external power source the green LED Fig ure 5 p 26 is on You can run the instrument from external power and charge the batteries Y Compared to a USB power source charging the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is a lot faster when you use the power supply of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 because it supplies a much higher current than a host conforming to the USB standard 11 2 Charging the FLIR identiFINDER R300 11 1 1 Wall Mounted Power Supply The power supply can handle common international AC voltages and frequencies It features a swappable adaptor for various international receptacles Figure 235 p 230 Figure 236 p 230 Press Here Figure 235 Power Supply Removing the international adapter Figure 236 Power Supply Attaching an international adapter 11 2 Charging the FLIR identiFINDER R300 You can charge the built in battery by connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to an external power source BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 11 Powering the FLIR identiFINDER R300 3 To charge the batteries in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 1 Use the power supply to connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a wall outlet or equivalent
182. merical uses except in the production of 9Pu CY Special nuclear material A mixture of 2 Pu and 3 Pu in various concentrations Mixtures with low 9Pu concentration are used to build most nuclear fission weapons bombs and warheads O Naturally occurring radioactive material There are no specific commercial or medical uses for this isotope of potassium but itis occurring naturally Typical concentrations found in food deliver 140 uSv a 180 uSv a Higher K concentrations can present a considerable cancer inducing risk Naturally occurring radioactive material A decay product of uranium and thorium it occurs in virtually all rock soil and water in low concentrations 20 of the 7 Ra that is in gested via food and water is deposited into the bone Although this makes the nuclide dangerous itself it presents its greatest risk when it decays into Ra which is an odorless tasteless radioactive gas that can be inhaled into the lungs C Nuclide Library Samarium 153 23M Sm 153 47h Selenium 345 Se 15 120d Silver Hong Ag 110m Sodium Na Na 22 249d 19h 2 6a Technetium 99 4310 c 99m 6h 1m Thallium 2917 11 201 3d1h Industrially used material Pharmaceutically marketed as Quadramet it is used for relieving pain caused by secondary cancers within the bone Also used for treating prostate and breast cancer Industrially used material In
183. mes RIO tci ce my gt 0 Listing A 13 DoseRate Update 1 AA ue ECHO UNE Update name DoseRate type nanoRaider id SerialNumber gt 3 Property name DoseRate value 10 units prem h gt 4 lt Update gt 0 A 7 6 Neutron Rate Neutron properties are only available on instruments that contain an He 3 tube A 7 SPP Commands and Updates Listing A 14 NeutronRate Command 1 K Cosi SS Ne oM C ENIM Command name NeutronRate gt 10 Listing A 15 NeutronRate Update 1 cuu ycocsxom 1 0 Gmueocdgust mbt 3 eS 2 Update name NeutronRate type nanoRaider id SerialNumber gt 3 lt Property name NeutronRate value 10 units cps gt 4 lt Update gt 0 A 7 7 Serial Number Listing A 16 SerialNumber Command M uL wcesssome s d SO ue NEG E Command name SerialNumber gt 10 Listing A 17 SerialNumber Update i Em nemo O A ir 9 6 gt 2 lt Update name SerialNumber type nanoRaider id SerialNumber gt 0 A 7 8 Other Commands and Updates Other command and update implementations can be considered upon request Please feel free to contact FLIR Detection with any questions or comments identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 B Maintenance Appendix B Maintenance B 1 Field Maintenance The FLIR identiFINDER R300 requires neither field maintenance nor field calibration Under no circumstances should any part of the housing be penetrated or re
184. moved If necessary clean the instrument with a dry lint free cloth bx After certain service intervals see A 1 p 237 you should send the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a service organization see B 4 p 257 for preventive maintenance and performance opti mization B 2 Software Installation Software like firmware or application updates can be uploaded to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 via the administration page of the web server see 8 17 p 215 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 accepts uploaded files only with correct digital signature The FLIR identiFINDER R300 displays a message after it received a file Figure 241 p 256 Press to discard the file or ASES to install it The display keeps you posted about the processing of the file and the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will restart after the successful installation FLIR Detection III Software Update 28 Mar 15 20 Een Software Update A software update is available nanoRaider Update bin Do you want to install or ignore it Install Ignore Figure 241 After uploading a software package B 3 Storage The FLIR identiFINDER R300 should be stored in a dry and clean location If possible it should be stored at room temperature EE LL identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection B Maintenance B 4 After Sales Service and Support Em Please keep the serial number and the version information Figure 3 p 23 Figure 138 p 13
185. mple the display of dose alarm thresholds see 6 33 p 161 Sievert Sievert is a derived unit according to the International System of Units and the legally prescribed unit in many jurisdictions identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 ee 6 32 Alarm Indicators rem R ntgen equivalent in man rem is an outdated unit and no longer allowed in many jurisdictions Em 1 Sv 100 rem Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 32 Alarm Indicators gt Options Menu p 103 gt Alarm Options p 105 gt Alarm Indicators EL Settings p 180 Alarm p 188 gt Alarm Indicators p 188 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 reports various events with on screen messages Additionally you can have it report events especially alarms with other methods Figure 174 p 160 You can switch each of the annunciation methods independently A Alarm Indicators On Beeper On Vibrator On Down Figure 174 Alarm indication settings The signals used to report alarms are detailed in chapter 5 p 97 Settings and Commands Switch the alarm LEDs on or off 0 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference Em This setting does not affect the power status LED It cannot be switched off Switch the beeper on or off Switch the vibrator on or off
186. n Search Cancel Figure 158 No devices detected 7 To start the pairing with the chosen device press EE 8 Choose the PIN type for a trusted connection Figure 160 p 147 Most devices require the entry of an ad hoc random PIN to establish a trusted connec tion Other devices require the usage of a fixed PIN like 0000 or 1234 Em For questions refer to the manual that came with your Bluetooth device identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection Down Figure 159 List of suitable Bluetooth devices detected l Bluetooth Periphery 4 l Use 0000 Use 1234 Down Exit Figure 160 Selecting a PIN for the pairing of Bluetooth devices identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 23 Bluetooth 9 If your device requires a PIN entry use the PIN shown on your FLIR identiFINDER R300 screen Figure 161 p 148 O0 Bluetooth Periphery 23 Mar 16 53 amp Information Pairing ls in progress Check your device if further steps are needed The PIN is Cancel Figure 161 Pairing with a Bluetooth device 10 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 shows some information about the Bluetooth device after a successful pairing Figure 162 p 148 OU Bluetooth Periphery 23 Mar 17 00 2 Device Details Device name Jane s Mobile Device address 1F2E3D4C5B6A Connection Dial Up Network P Figure 162 Paired to a Bluetooth device A An error me
187. n 114 Cancel 35 39 41 43 46 47 95 111 118 122 125 127 129 133 134 137 138 143 149 150 153 155 159 164 Change 128 Change device 224 Channel 114 Choose 138 Clear 108 111 116 129 Clear Markers 110 Co 60 116 Confirm 87 Continue 65 76 93 117 Cs 137 116 Cursor Right 109 Delete 44 150 154 Dose 89 91 Down 36 38 82 118 122 125 127 128 137 143 145 148 150 153 155 159 164 225 DU 116 Energy 114 Erase 135 134 Exit 36 73 91 93 95 108 113 116 118 122 125 127 128 132 134 137 139 142 143 145 149 150 152 155 157 159 165 227 Finder 73 75 88 GPS 130 Identify 75 90 113 Ignore 255 Insert 45 150 154 Install 255 K 40 116 L 47 Left 35 41 43 127 150 154 162 163 Linear 114 Load 112 Logarithmic 114 LT 114 M 47 Mark Channel 109 Mn 54 116 Mute 71 98 165 Cursor Left 109 Na 22 116 OK 47 Options 88 90 Preset 115 Presets 115 R 47 Reset 132 157 Reset Dose 157 Right 35 41 43 127 150 154 162 163 RT 114 Save 112 Search 145 224 225 Select 36 38 41 43 46 82 118 122 125 127 128 137 143 146 148 150 153 155 159 164 225 Send 81 92 114 115 138 Send Identification 92 114 Send Spectrum 115 Settings 142 Shut Down 65 Skip 35 39 41 43 45 47 77 81 92 107 118 119 121 Spectrum 77 93 Square Root 114 Start 92 107 134 151 Start Search 82
188. n 18 Mar 16 52 we Password Entry LMRLMRL Cancel Figure 36 Password entered but not yet confirmed U Information Information The password you entered was wrong Figure 37 Message after entering a wrong password identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 2 8 Taking Screenshots You can save the contents of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s display at any time gt To take a screenshot 1 Press and hold 2 Press 0 Em You have to press Q even if you swapped the assignment of the operating keys 6 9 p 122 A Do not wait too long between pressing O and L otherwise you might initiate the power down command 2 6 p 64 Screenshots are saved in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s permanent memory as image files named after the screen taken suffixed by the current date time and time zone offset To access the saved screenshots connect your FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a computer 8 14 p 207 You can check the number of saved screenshots in the status display 6 14 p 130 Figure 38 p 49 or erase them 6 18 p 134 III Status Information 17 Mar 15 35 EA System Serial Number 103156000000 Available Memory 95 Screenshots 12 IP Address 172 16 0 1 Software 2014 4 Figure 38 Status display showing the number of saved screenshots identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 a 2 3 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Holster
189. n meters above or below the mean sea level as defined by the WGS84 geoid used by GPS Return to the superior menu 6 15 Reset Factory Settings gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Maintenance p 104 gt Reset Factory Settings This command Figure 140 p 132 discards all changes you made to any of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s settings and reestablishes the settings made at the factory A The password see 2 2 7 p 46 if any is reset to the factory setting as well 110 Confirmation 22 Mar 10 12 Confirmation Reset all parameters to factory settings Figure 140 Reestablishing the factory default settings Settings and Commands Discard all your personal settings and return to the factory default settings rr identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 mE 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference Cancel Keep the current settings and return to the superior menu 6 16 Erase All Spectra Options Menu p 103 More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Maintenance p 104 gt Erase Data p 104 gt Erase All Spectra This command Figure 141 p 133 deletes all spectra saved in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database including min max average for dose rate and neutron GPS location and identification if any III Confirmation 22 Mar 10 20 EJ Confirmation Erase all spectra Erase Cancel Figure 141 Deleting saved spe
190. n results For correct values you have to ensure the correct setting of the clock and the correct specification of your local time zone see 6 10 p 125 The correct time and date can be set using the GPS receiver built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 If it is switched on see 6 11 p 127 it adjusts the clock to the high precision UTC time received from the GPS satellites All you have to specify is your local time zone see 6 10 p 125 Tf the internal clock is completely off for example after storing the instrument with empty batteries for a couple of weeks you have to adjust the internal clock and specify the time zone see 6 10 p 125 A one minute countdown is shown instead of the current clock to announce the beginning of scheduled automated identification measurement see 4 4 p 93 A satellite symbolizes the state of the GPS receiver GPS receiver is switched off factory setting 6 11 p 127 GPS receiver is switched on 6 11 p 127 but the GPS reception is not good enough to determine the current position Invalid coordinates marked as such are saved GPS receiver is switched on 6 11 p 127 and the GPS reception is sufficient to deter mine the current position which is saved with measurement data and identification re sults A light bulb symbolizes the current energy saving options a The FLIR identiFINDER R300 will not try to save energy because the current opera tion requires an active disp
191. nd Figure 126 p 121 A The severity of some nuclides is fixed This is indicated by a small padlock symbol Settings and Commands Choose one from the list of nuclides to edit the associated severity Innocent BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference mm seinas AAA Nuclide Severity Neutrons Threatening Locked Setting i Pu mix Threatening i Select Figure 126 Severity information in the nuclide list used by the identification algorithm A Suspicious E Threatening Cycle the list of commands see 2 2 1 p 35 ED E gt Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 8 Presets gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Presets This screen Figure 127 p 122 groups options that influence the data acquisition for spectra 6 2 p 106 You can stop the data acquisition for spectra manually or have it stop automatically after a duration or a number of counts you specify here AN You can preset either one of these limits If you try to enter a second preset the others will be set to No Limit Em Preset limits remain in effect until you change them or switch off your FLIR identiFINDER R300 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 at 6 9 Display Settings WU Settings 21 Mar Presets Real Time N
192. ng the administration password identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 5 Starting Up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 25 Starting Up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 3 To start up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 1 Ensure that the instrument is clean and free of visible damages 2 Ensure that the battery is charged or connect the instrument to an external power source see 11 2 p 230 3 Press and hold O for a moment The red LED flashes If your variant is equipped with a neutron detector the blue LED flashes as well 4 Release the key Wait a moment while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 e Identifies itself Figure 53 p 62 2 4 nanoRaider Figure 53 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Product identification e goes through start up procedures Figure 54 p 63 e initializes the software Figure 55 p 63 AN If the time of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s internal clock is unreasonable most proba bly caused by the battery being empty for some weeks you will be asked to set the clock see 6 10 p 125 5 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 switches to the dose rate display Figure 56 p 63 and is ready for operation EE identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 SFLIR Figure 54 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Starting up Initializing Battery 70 Software 2014 4 Available Memory 95 Figure 55 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R30
193. o 1173 241 Am 59 54 2387 DU 1001 235U HEU 185 7 Refer to Appendix C p 259 for details about the nuclides Make sure the source selected to be checked is present when using this command x For best results move the instrument to a low radiation environment to check the calibration Data for this spectrum are continuously acquired beginning with an empty spectrum upon entering this screen or after you cleared the data see below Settings and Commands Nuclide The nuclide used for the calibration check refer to Table 1 p 115 6 4 Identification Settings mugs 21 Mar 12 19 M Calibration Check Counts at the Peak s Theoretical Position 328 keV Nucide Cs 137 Peak Position 663 4 Uncertainty 13 4 4 Deviation 0 247 o Peak FWHM 2 93 9 Boundaries of the d TT i E lo 22 Analyzed Region Figure 122 Checking the calibration Peak Position The position of the measured peak keV Uncertainty The statistical uncertainty of the peak This value decreases with an increasing number of counts you can expect reliable results for values below 0 5 96 Em Do not trust the figures alone watch the spectrum chart to verify the existence of a peak Deviation The measured peak s position deviation from the theoretical position Peak FWHM The full width at half maximum height of the measured peak GED GES CED CIO QEDD GD GD EE Cycle through the nuclid
194. o Limit Live Time No Limit Counts No Limit Figure 127 Preset times for spectrum data acquisition Settings and Commands Specify the duration of data acquisition as real time You can specify durations up to 43200 s 12 h or No Limit Specify the duration of data acquisition as live time You can specify durations up to 43200 s 12 h or No Limit Specify the number of counts to be acquired You can specify values from 100 to 9 999 900 in steps of 100 or No Limit Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 9 Display Settings gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt General Options p 104 gt Display Settings LS Settings p 180 General p 184 gt User Interface p 186 This screen groups several options that influence the display of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 Fig ure 128 p 123 MEE identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference 21 Mar 14 45 EA Display Backlight 10 Timeout 155 Language English Figure 128 Display settings in daytime colors Settings and Commands Colors Choose a color set for the display Daytime Colors optimized for bright environments Figure 128 p 123 Almost all screen shots in this manual were taken using this color set Nigh
195. ocent gt 28 lt category gt 29 lt settings gt You can use this file for example to e backup the settings and restore them after you experiment with various settings on the in strument e document the settings used in your team or e distribute identical settings to several instruments used in your team s Uploaded settings files may be incomplete that is they may contain only some settings Using this method you can distribute some settings to several instruments while other settings remain unchanged on the individual instrument Backup The name of a settings file starts with the serial number of the instrument Download the settings file to your computer Restore Specify a settings file to be uploaded to your FLIR identiFINDER R300 Enter the path to the settings file Browse Use your computer s standard method to choose a settings file Upload Transfer the file to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The software of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will check the formal integrity of the file you uploaded AN If the uploaded file contains for example syntax errors or unknown settings the complete file will be rejected and the settings of the instrument will remain un changed In other words you cannot damage the FLIR identiFINDER R300 by uploading a wrong or corrupt file You can however upload a file with settings making no sense for your field of application 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web
196. of Spectrum 0 060 uSv h Figure 108 Anatomy of the spectrum display The largest part of the screen is used for the spectrum chart Figure 108 p 106 Various status information is shown around the chart Figure 109 p 107 Acquisition Duration The time passed while acquiring data for the spectrum as real or live time Dead Time The dead time as a percentage of the real time Gamma Count The total gamma counts comprising the spectrum Neutron Count The total number of neutrons counted while acquiring data for the spectrum Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Scaling The current scaling of the vertical axis linear logarithmic square root Horizontal Coordinates The coordinates of the leftmost and rightmost values currently shown on the horizontal axis depending on current zoom state and cursor position BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference End Coordinate of Horizontal Axis Otart Coordinate of Horizontal Axis an 7 Spectrum 23 Mar 14 06 3072 keV Scaling of i Vertical Axis Chart T P Horizontal Scale 333 Zoom Acquisition Duration Gamma Counts G RT 171 85 Gc 166074 Neutron Counts 0 060 USV fh DT 0 6 0 Nc 258 Available only for variante Dead Time Current Dose Rate Independent of Spectrum equipped with a neutron detector Figure 109 Spectrum information aro
197. on Alarms 4 180 Open Source Software 180 Remote Server 180 Reports 180 Restore 180 Service 179 System 179 User Interface 180 WGPu 288 WGS84 288 World Geodetic System WGS84 288 X XML Extensible Markup Language 289 x xml file type 183 195 Y Ymax 2 key function 114 Ymax 4 key function 114 Z Z 289 Zip file type 56 197 198 202 203 Zoom 1 5 MeV key function 110 Zoom 1 1 key function 110 Zoom 3 MeV key function 110 Zoom ROI key function 110 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 INDEX Europe Africa Middle East FLIR Detection Inc Luxemburgstraat 2 2321 Meer Belgium Z 32 0 3665 5106 32 0 3303 5624 SFLIR Americas FLIR Detection Inc 100 Midland Road Oak Ridge TN 37830 USA Z 1 865 220 8700 1 865 220 7181 PA radiation support flir com detectionsupport com radiation www flircom Asia Pacific FLIR Detection Inc 3 Pickering Street 03 49 Nankin Row Singapore 048660 65 6822 1595
198. on consult a textbook or an encyclopedia 12 Hour Clock A historic convention in which the 24 hours of the day are split into two halves called ante meridiem a m before mid day and post meridiem p m after mid day Each half com prises 12 hours numbered 12 acting as zero 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and 11 see Table 4 p 287 724 Hour Clock Table 3 The 12 and 24 hour clock notation 12 Hour Clock midnight begin of day 12 00 a m 12 01 a m 12 59 a m 1 00 a m 2 00 a m 11 00 a m 11 59 a m noon 12 00 p m 12 01 p m 12 59 p m 1 00 p m 2 00 p m 11 00 p m 11 59 p m midnight end of day 24 hour Clock 00 00 00 01 00 59 01 00 02 00 11 00 11 59 12 00 12 01 12 59 13 00 14 00 23 00 23 59 00 00 of next day D Glossary 24 Hour Clock The ISO 8601 convention of time keeping dividing the day running from midnight to mid night into 24 hours The notation indicates the hours passed since midnight from 0 to 23 cf 712 Hour Clock Also known as Army Time Military Time Astronomical Time Radio Time Railway Time Continental Time A Mass Number a Particle Alpha Particle a Radiation Alpha Radiation Absorbed Dose The amount of energy deposited in matter by Ionizing Radiation given in Gray In contrast to the Equivalent Dose the absorbed dose does not differentiate the biological effects of the ionizing radiation Acrylic Glass Polymet
199. on designed to spread radioactive material with the intent to kill or cause disruption identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 a D Glossary Also known as Radiological Dispersal Device Dirty Bomb Radionuclide A radioactive Nuclide Railway Time 7 24 Hour Clock RDD Radiological Dispersion Device Reachback The process of transmitting information from a field deployed instrument to a lab or other facility for further analysis Reactor Grade Plutonium RGPu Reactor Grade Plutonium is a special mixture of 239Dy 240pu ang other Isotopes which contains 219 96 Pu 40Pu has a high rate of spontaneous fission leading to an increased number of Neutrons and bears the risk of premature starting chain reactions Further grades are Fuel Grade Plutonium and Weapons Grade Plutonium Real Time RT The real or total time of a detection system comprises the Live Time and the Dead Time Also known as Total Time True Time Region of Interest ROI A selected subset of samples within a Spectrum identified for a particular purpose rem R ntgen Equivalent in Man Remote Network Driver Interface Specification RNDIS A Microsoft proprietary protocol providing a virtual Ethernet connection used mostly via USB Resolution In spectroscopical application the resolution gives a useful measure to estimate how well two or more Peaks can be distinguished It is consequently defined as the width of a pea
200. on detector Identify Options Figure 90 Finder mode Continuous measurement The vertical scaling of the chart is adjusted continuously to make best use of the available screen height A dashed line above the chart indicates the adjustable see 6 30 p 157 threshold for audi ble feed back If the count rate rises above this level you get notified by the red LED the vibrator and the beeper The sound frequency is proportional to the count rate that is the closer the instru ment gets to the source the higher the tone You can mute the sound by pressing O for a moment Muting remains in effect until you leave and re enter the Finder mode and the background measurement is repeated Settings and Commands Dose Switch to Dose Rate mode see 4 1 p 86 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 ta 4 3 Identification Mode Switch to Identification mode see 4 3 p 90 Inspect and change options see 6 p 103 43 Identification Mode You can switch the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to Identification Mode to perform the actions neces sary to identify the nuclides gamma radiation is originating from The instrument acquires a gamma spectrum for a duration you can specify 6 4 p 116 and shows the progress and some parameters of the measurement Figure 91 p 90 A The spectrum acquired here overwrites the current contents of the spectrum viewer 6 2 p 106 Data acquisition in the spectrum viewer if an
201. ormed operation or the current mode the instrument is switched to and some icons representing the status of several components of the instrument When a warning or an alarm is raised the alarm information is shown alternating with the title see for example Figure 100 p 98 Title and Status Bar lt um Jose R ate 28 Mar 1 3 39 Energy Saving Options Dose Rate GPS Status Date Time Screen Title Alarm Info Main Display rea Battery Status Sel B Ve ns usv h 0 000 cps Neutrons MuR Finder Options Figure 8 Anatomy of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 display The power indicator and the title are grouped in the left part of the bar Full battery urb ur b uw b fr CT Empty or no battery HER Triangles symbolize the connection to an external power supply This information is also shown by a green LED see 11 2 p 230 BT A segment flickers while the battery is being charged The current date and time and indicators for the GPS receiver and the energy saving op tions are grouped in the right part of the title bar 19 Feb 14 10 The current local date and time are shown as day month hours 24 hour notation and minutes 2 1 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Display The time is supplied by the clock built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 It uses UTC a k a Greenwich Time for internal purposes and for time stamping records saved in the database for example spectra or identificatio
202. osorno AAA 75 35 Communicate with a Local Computer ee 77 3 6 Sending Results toa Remote Server 2 222 eee bee ee 81 o GUC DIE s 5o UR 9 AAA 84 4 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes 85 41 DoseRate Mode 24 44 555 55 4 om Hoe eee ee ee EERE EEE EEE So OO 86 42 SAPS 2x 3 3 3333 359939555999999292223 2752 2552 25443 44 88 1 3 Identification Mode 2 22 2ee cba mox xo o m as 90 4 4 Automated Mode cccc eee eee eo Reg 33 33 3 3 3 3 3 a 93 45 Remote Controlled Spectrum Acquisition c n 95 5 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Alarms 97 5 1 GammaAlarms eee oh s n nons 98 Be Ne tronAlarmS 225325000 or99rrririsrr2222 AAA 101 59 Sigma Notifications 4 lt 4 ER Roo HS GH 9 H tico cloro oribus e SSS 101 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference 103 6 1 Complete Option Menus Outline s scs RRTPRPSRSSGGOS a 103 6 2 COPE ca E E E RARA 106 B CAUDraAON sasesana aa Aaaa a a a a a A A AR 115 6 4 Identification Settings III a 116 G De Vie te eee ee ee ee hehehe eee SSEESE DES EE oo og 118 BD NUchde U os Lew 9553 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 9 2 3 4 3 2 9 4 3 9 3 9d dr dd 119 6 amp 7 Nuclide Severity Ln i aee RE TR TT TT 39 TR ed 120 6 8 PERSE 293 444444444 9239992999229 ERE ER 2 42 2 EE vu dd 121 F WISP Seis DTP 122 ES ACES ONES resarcir 125 EIL ESCUDOS paar aa daa 127 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection DIS SeLPIS WO faeces er eee eee hee eR eee es 128 6 13
203. ote server Figure 164 p 149 Entering and editing text with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s limited number of keys is of course challenging It is simi lar to editing composite values as described in 2 2 4 p 40 with every character being a component Editing text is a lot more convenient via the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s web interface see 8 p 179 Several commands are available if you see 2 2 3 p 37 text values for editing These com mands are mapped to the Q key Use mapped to 0 to cycle through the available com mands see 2 2 1 p 35 During text editing exactly one character is selected Figure 27 p 43 that is editing commands are applied to this character UU Settings Selected Entry Field Operator Name Voice Phone 1 800 555 0142 Selected Character Reveal More Commands Select Next Character Figure 27 Editing Text First character J is selected To select another character use or Figure 28 p 44 If you reach the left end of the text does nothing At the end of the text however moves to two additional characters spaces to facilitate appending another word to the text identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN E 2 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys EAN Reports Operator Name JlhnDe Selected Entry Field Selected Character Voice Phone 1 800 555 0142 Reveal More Commands Select Next Character Right Figure 28 Editing Text Next
204. ou entered this command from the Identification Mode see 4 3 p 90 or the spectrum display see 6 2 p 106 the correct record is already chosen identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 21 Send Identification A summary of the chosen identification is shown Figure 146 p 138 so you can verify your choice and choose other data if necessary Em The spectrum analyzed to compute the identification results is always included with the sent data 24 Mar 11 08 Send Type Identification Record Number 28 Saved on 2011 03 24 at 11 06 GPS Coordinates Included Figure 146 Sending Data Identification summary Settings and Commands Choose another record for sending Figure 145 p 137 Start sending the chosen data A Several settings see 9 p 219 are required to send data If any one of these settings is missing you will be notified Figure 147 p 139 and routed to the appropriate screen to enter the missing setting 4z We recommend specifying the required settings before sending data see 6 24 p 149 and 6 27 p 153 The most convenient way to do so is via the web interface see 8 6 1 p 190 During the transfer of data you will be kept posted about the progress of the transmission steps Figure 148 p 139 After all data are successfully transferred you will be notified Figure 149 p 140 and can acknowledge the message with e oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for de
205. pdate Format 0 o o o es 247 A 6 6 General Error Format uuu e poes A 248 AY SPP Commands and Updates uu 99x EEE EEE EEE KES SH OO 249 A 7 1 EIU 23333 34 25999994999 9952422 5922 29 4 9 4 94 249 A 7 2 sec ak eee eh eee rr AAA ss 250 A 7 3 Re si cese 252 A 7 4 Bono rre RARA a ARA 253 A 7 5 Dose RIE issisiidna mR Dce sG eJ34323 4 3G 33 5433 253 A 7 6 Neuton INES enana ao AA 253 A 7 7 Serial Number noaa 254 A 7 8 Other Commands and Updates lle 254 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection B Maintenance 255 B L Field Maintenance ux n cow 930 903 9 POR X POR RO 4 7 3 E 3k 3 3 R4 43 255 B 2 Software Installati0D ellen s 255 El MIO Ga eee eRe ERE EEE EER Es SS SS 256 B 4 After Sales Service and Support 0 cee es 207 C Nuclide Library 259 D Glossary 267 Index 291 EMEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection List of Figures 1 The FLIR identiFINDERR300 with accessories ee 21 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 with accessories in Pelican carrying case 22 3 Name plate at the rear side of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 23 4 Functional units of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 see text 25 5 Map of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 components a 26 6 Surveying an object with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 27 7 Papercraft model of t
206. press Aids If Finder mode is disabled then Albi will be present so proceed to the next step 2 Press MEA to switch to Identification Mode Figure 70 p 75 M Identification 24 Mar 16 09 woo p f Best Range Ol n ou rce Schematic Count Rate orto 4 294 USV h 0 2 DT nen puration 18 s of 50s 414 cps Current Count Rate Keep distance to source mice Figure 70 Spectrum acquisition in Identification Mode The FLIR identiFINDER R300 begins to acquire a spectrum of the radiation Normally there is a preset acquisition duration but you can change that to a minimum number of counts set at the factory 6 4 p 116 3 Move the instrument into a good position for optimal data acquisition Try to getthe current count rate marker into the center of the schematic indicator Figure 70 p 75 by getting closer to or away from the source 3 4 Identifying a Radiation Source mug identification 24 Mar 16 25 e Best Range Point unit itto source Current Count Rate 0 761 uSv h 0 0 DT s of 50s 16cps Move closer to source if possible Advice Figure 71 Finding the position for best measurements The FLIR identiFINDER R300 assists with advice given on screen Figure 71 p 76 4 Wait until the preset acquisition duration is over The FLIR identiFINDER R300 applies the identification algorithm to the acquired data and shows the result Figure 72 p 76 Addit
207. ptions p 103 gt Nuclide Visibility E settings p 180 gt Nuclides p 193 Built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is a library used to identify the nuclides causing gamma ra diation Please refer to Appendix C p 259 for further information about the nuclides in this library You can specify which nuclides should be included in the display of identification results Fig ure 124 p 119 Settings and Commands Choose one from the list of nuclides to specify whether you want it to be shown or suppressed in identification results Suppressed nuclides are reported as Unknown if recognized by the identification algorithm Cycle the list of commands see 2 2 1 p 35 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference ITI Settings 21 Mar 13 23 2 Nuclide Visibility i Ag 110m Show i Am 241 Show Figure 124 Top of the nuclide list used by the identification algorithm ED ED Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 6 Nuclide Usage gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Identification Options p 103 gt Nuclide Usage B Settings p 180 gt Nuclides p 193 Built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is a library used to identify the nuclides causing gamma ra diation Please refer to Appendix C p 259 for further information about the nuclides in this library Every nuclid
208. puter You can access the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s settings and stored data from a computer locally con nected to the instrument The FLIR identiFINDER R300 acts as a web server so you need no special software other than your standard web browser For some computer operating systems however you need to install drivers for the connection Please refer to section 7 p 167 for details gt To transfer identification results to a local computer A These instructions assume that your computer is correctly prepared Consult section 7 p 167 or your IT administrator for help 1 Connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer with the included USB cable refer to section 7 1 p 168 for details After establishing the connection the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will display its IP address Figure 74 p 78 2 Use your computer s standard web browser to navigate to the given IP address The FLIR identiFINDER R300 s home page opens and displays diverse information regarding your FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 75 p 78 3 5 Communicate with a Local Computer 000 Information 25 Mar 12 13 Information To use the web interface point your browser to any one of http nanoRaider flir http 103156000000 fir http 172 16 0 1 OK Figure 74 Valid IP address after a connection was established Serial Number Instrument Type nanoRaider Main Menu Info Settings Data Live Screen gt Live Spect
209. radiation level is near the background level Extra Duration Specify the duration of continued data acquisition for the nuclide identification This dura tion is applied when you use the command in identification mode see 4 3 p 90 no matter whether you specified the duration or the minimum number of counts above You can specify an extra duration from 1 s to 999 s 16 m 39 s Specify if you wantthe level of confidence ofa nuclide identification shown or hidden in iden tification results The confidence is expressed on a scale from 0 poor to 10 excellent identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 5 Nuclide Visibility Specify if you want the usage of an identified nuclide shown or hidden in identification results for details refer to 6 6 p 119 or C p 259 Specify if you want the severity of an identified nuclide shown by icons or hidden in identifi cation results for details refer to 6 7 p 120 or C p 259 Innocent A Suspicious QD Threatening U Pu Specify whether all uranium isotopes and all plutonium isotopes respectively should be identified together as element uranium or separately as nuclides 7 U 2 8U etc D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 65 Nuclide Visibility gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Identification O
210. radioactive fall out resulting from hazardous incidents in nuclear power plants Industrially used material Used in research in red blood cell survival studies Industrially used material Included in medical in vitro diagnostic kits it is commonly used as a radiological marker to estimate organ size C Nuclide Library 60 37CO Co 60 Europium 152 Z3 EU Eu 152 Gallium Ga Ga 67 Holmium 166m 67 HO Ho 166m Indium Him In 111 lodine 123 531 1 123 125 53l IATA 131 53l LOW 5 3a 13 5a 3d6h 1200a 2d19h 13h 60d 8d C Industrially used material Used to sterilize surgical instruments and to improve the safety and reliability of industrial fuel oil burners Also used in cancer treatment food irradiation industrial gauges and radiography O Industrially used material Used in nuclear reactor control rods In some countries this nuclide has been substituted in place of Co for radiation therapy 0 Medically used material Used to pinpoint infections and tumors Also used in PET scans for studying the brain and the heart functions O Industrially used material Used in physics experiments and research and can also be used in nu clear control rods used in reactors D Medically used material Used for special diagnostic studies e g brain studies infection and colon transit studies O Medically used material Used to diagnose thyroid func
211. rate rises above a threshold C which is represented by the dashed line across the top of the Finder display Figure 90 p 89 Thethreshold is related to the average background count rate BCR measured when you en ter the Finder mode its variation o BCR and the sensitivity you specify here according to 100 C BCR 3 5 Care eo a TO s BCR 3 5 0 Sensitivity 96 This equation is solved for some common values of the background variation o in Table 2 p 158 Look up the sensitivity value next to the desired o and enter it Table 2 Finder Mode Background variation vs sensitivity o Sensitivity 96 7 50 6 5 54 6 58 5 5 64 5 70 4 5 79 4 88 3 5 100 3 117 2 5 140 Z 175 1 75 200 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference D Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details 000 Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 31 Dose Rate Settings gt Options Menu p 103 gt Dose Rate Settings LOS Settings p 180 General p 184 Measurement p 184 This screen Figure 173 p 159 groups options that influence the display of dose and dose rate values see 4 1 p 86 m 22 Mar 15 55 2 Dose Rate Displayed Unit Sievert z Figure 173 Dose rate settings Settings and Commands Displayed Unit Choose the unit for the display of dose rates E This setting influences all displays of dose and dose rate values for exa
212. rdware if not Figure 188 p 173 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 7 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer FLIR USB RNDIS Driver Setup Installation Successful The FLIR USB RNDIS Driver 1 0 installation is complete Thank you for choosing FLIR USB RNDIS Driver Please click Finish to exit this installer Figure 187 End of the installation Found New Hardware x FLIR Systems USB RNDIS Network Connection Figure 188 Windows XP reporting new hardware at the notification area gt To install the software for new hardware Windows launches the wizard for new hardware Figure 189 p 173 Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD er on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Head our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software O Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device 2 No not this time Click Nexd to continue Figure 189 Windows XP New Hardware Wizard 1 Click e No not this time to avoid searching the Internet for a driver identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 7 3 Preparing the USB Network Connection on a Computer 2 Proceed to the following page Figure 190 p 174 by clicking Next Found New
213. re Update This web page Figure 221 p 215 lets you load files onto your FLIR identiFINDER R300 for soft ware updates The FLIR identiFINDER R300 will recognize the uploaded file and process it as de scribed in B 2 p 255 Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Software Update Software Update Select the file you want to upload After the upload has finished vou can install the update on the device Upload E 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 221 File upload web page Software Update Specify the file to be uploaded Selected File Enter the path to the file Browse Use your computer s standard method to choose a file Upload the file to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 8 18 Password Web Page m Administration p 181 Password You can change the administrator password see 2 4 6 p 60 on this web page Figure 222 p 216 Password of user x Enter the current password for the given user and the new password twice I S4 EFIRINEDO Donnic 90n4A AMADCOIDM EA LONA E i d enti r V D En RI JU en ZU 4 41 1 907 3 re bZU 5 8 19 System Files Web Page Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings i Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Password Password of user admin New password again sesssssseee 2013 1
214. rior menu 6 12 Set Password 252 Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Maintenance p 104 gt Change Password p 104 Set Password The password set at the factory if any is LMRLMRL For better protection against unwanted changes of the instrument characteristics you should change the password to something else If you don t need protection but want faster access to the menus you can remove the password 6 13 p 129 Make sure to remember the password you set There is no way to access the protected options and commands without it A password cannot be deciphered at the factory This command lets you enter a new password Figure 135 p 129 consisting of seven characters from the pool L M R Xt To cancel the entry of the password press After your entry is complete Figure 136 p 129 you can activate the password with or the password modification FLIR Detection 21 Mar 16 59 DE Change Password LMRLMRL Change Cance Figure 136 Entering a new password Confirmation 6 13 Clear Password gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Maintenance p 104 gt Change Password p 104 gt Clear Password This command clears the password All commands normally requiring a password to be accessed will be freely available You have to confirm this command with HA or can change your mind wit
215. ripherals including the keys and most prominently the sensors for radioactive radiation A cadmium zinc telluride CZT CdZnTe semiconductor crystal to record gamma radia tion spectra Two CdZnTe crystals for dose rate measurements A He detector for neutron radiation optional e Output of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is directed mainly to the screen plus some status lights a beeper and a vibrator symbolized by blue circles in Figure 4 p 25 e The light gray circles in Figure 4 p 25 represent elements accessible from the outside of the instrument like the communication facilities mE FLIR Detection USB socket Commu nication Bluetooth T Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Figure 4 Functional units of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 see text identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 BEEN 1 6 Instrument Description and Application Overview Operating Keys TR y Detector ON Otatus LED E A DN GPS ee o XL VOU Neutron Alarm LED p DNA NS SS AN detector Power Key M S USP Socket Figure 5 Map of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 components P Neutron Detec lt i Camma Alarm LED ta Available only for variante Lanyard Connector equipped with a neutron 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Chapter 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 i
216. rm Threshold 10 Counts 60 s Warning Threshold 2 Counts 60 s 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 204 Alarm Settings web page 8 5 2 Gamma Alarms LS Settings p 180 Alarm p 188 Gamma Alarms This web page section Figure 204 p 189 lets you inspect or set the thresholds for gamma alarms and warnings identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 tt 8 6 Connectivity Web Page You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under 252 Options Menu p 103 gt Alarm Options p 105 gt Dose Alarm Thresholds p 161 252 Options Menu p 103 gt Alarm Options p 105 gt Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds p 162 8 5 3 Neutron Alarms This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with a neutron detector see A 1 p237 EY Settings p 180 Alarm p 188 gt Neutron Alarms This web page section Figure 204 p 189 lets you inspect or set the thresholds for neutron alarms and warnings You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under 252 Options Menu p 103 gt Alarm Options p 105 gt Neutron Alarm Thresholds p 163 8 6 Connectivity Web Page E settings p 180 Connectivity This web page Figure 205 p 191 comprises various settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 r
217. ron detector Reset both the Gamma Dose and Dose Duration Measuring is not interrupted merely the accumulated values are set to zero o Stop the accumulation of data for neutrons if available and gamma To reset the accumulators and timers for neutrons if available and gamma counts to zero and resume accumulating new data press again Return to the superior menu 6 30 Finder Settings gt Options Menu p 103 Finder Settings O settings p 180 General p 184 Measurement p 184 This screen Figure 172 p 157 groups options that influence the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s be havior in Finder mode see 4 2 p 88 110 Settings 22 Mar 15 20 Available Yes Integration Time 1s Sensitivity 100 96 Figure 172 Finder settings identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 30 Finder Settings Settings and Commands Available Choose Yes to enable selection of Finder mode or No to disable Integration Time Specify the time for which the FLIR identiFINDER R300 should average the measured count rate You can choose from 1s 2s 5s The smaller the value the more lively the display the larger the value the better the chance to find weaker sources sensitivity Specify the sensitivity for audible feedback in Finder mode see 4 2 p 88 You can specify values from 50 to 200 96 While in Finder mode the FLIR identiFINDER R300 emits sound when the count
218. rons only Multi Channel Scaling MCS An acquisition mode for discrete Spectra All counts N registered during a period At are stored in one channel After that period all counts are stored in the next channel and so on Figure 244 p 280 N42 AANSI N42 42 n42 Common file name suffix for 7 ANSI N42 42 files Nal Sodium Iodide Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material NORM Radionuclides occurring in the Earth lithosphere or atmosphere for example potassium uranium and their daughter products D Glossary N N t At N t 3At N to N t 2At Channel Figure 244 Multi Channel Scaling Navstar Global Positioning System Global Positioning System Neutron A subatomic particle with no electric charge usually found in the Nucleus of atoms Neu trons bound in nuclei are stable free neutrons however undergo beta Decay with a mean lifetime of about 12 minutes Free Neutrons having different energies are categorized by the Neutron Temperature Neutron Detection Thermal neutrons Neutron Temperature can be detected by observing their interac tion with Nuclei like He 7 He Detector 9Li 9B or 7Gd These interactions produce Particle Radiation or Gamma Radiation which is subsequently detected To detect fast neutrons Neutron Temperature a Moderator must be applied Neutron Temperature An energy scale for free Neutrons The most important categories are fa
219. rum gt Administration Info Model nanoRaider ZH Serial Number 103156000000 Software Version 2013 1 Available Memory 94 Spectroscopic Detector One CdZnTe 15x13x5 Dose Rate Detector Two additional CdZnTe 15x13x5 Neutron Detector He tube 3He3 608 15NS Service Europe Africa Service Americas Asia Pacific Middle East FLIR Radiation GmbH FLIR Radiation Inc Piepersberg 12 100 Midland Road 42653 Solingen Oak Ridge TN 37830 Germany USA T 49 212 222090 T 1 865 220 8700 F 49 212 201045 F 1 865 220 7187 radiation support eu flir com radiation support flir com gs flir com detection radiation gs flir com detection radiation 2013 1 FLIR Radiarion MM Figure 75 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 s home page 3 Open the table with identification records stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database Figure 76 p 79 via the menu Data Identifications 4 To look for the desired data you can click the sorting button in one of the column titles Fig ure 76 p 79 5 If many records are stored in the database you might need to turn pages with the multipage table navigation Figure 76 p 79 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 3 Field Operating Guide Serial Number 103156000000 nanoRaider Info Settings 2 Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum 5 Administration 2 Multi Page Table Navigation Identifications o Column Titl
220. s storage mode the FLIR identiFINDER R300 identifies itself as an RNDIS device A computer running Microsoft Windows Windows 7 detecting the device checks whether the device is known and will report the detection of new hardware if not Figure 197 p 177 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 7 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer Welcome Welcome to the installer for the FLIR USB RNDIS Driver 1 0 It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before continuing with this installation If you have any other programs running please click Cancel close the programs and run this setup again Otherwise please click Install to proceed with the installation Figure 195 Beginning of the installation Installation Successful The FLIR USB RNDIS Driver 1 0 installation is complete Thank you for choosing FLIR USB RNDIS Driver Please click Finish to exit this installer JM Installing device driver software Click here for status Figure 197 Windows 7 reporting and configuring new hardware The system installs the driver software for the device and reports when the device is ready to use in the notification area Figure 198 p 178 You are now ready to use the web interface of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 see 8 p 179 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 7 4 Using the Network Connection i FLIR Systems USB RNDIS Network Connection
221. s CO D 2 2 a DOO SD ULTTS TO 190 50 Connectivity Web Page i222 x 225 2 92522JZz W3 33 3 OSH 190 9 6 1 Local Area Network 24 8600 08 oo ee p DER OR UR OR RE RC OR OR ORC OR OR lA ea a 190 8 6 2 e Server EII 192 8 6 3 PRDDEDE cave www 994 4 9 4 999 9 4252 55 3 3 2 2 9 2 3 3 5 192 8 6 4 Download Options err nn 192 6 7 Bluetooth SPP Settings Web Pag coo uon oom REESE Re eee x om ox eds 192 O71 Bluetooth SPP Settings Web Page 192 8 8 Nuclides Web Page cece oko omo mo 3 3 9 9 3 x RO bees ee eee oPEAREES 193 8 9 Backup Web Page 2 x 9 ox 9 9 X 8 RR onm km a A 194 8 10 BulkDownload WebPage leen 197 8 11 Identifications Web Page vvv 9m sud Rb RUE An Ris sS 199 8 11 1 Identification Details Web Page uuu ca ae ee ee Rams 200 0 12 Spectra Web Pape soccer 202 8 12 1 Spectrum Details Web Page s2cccicecasevecevvr een eee beeen 203 8 13 Alarms Web Page aucem oom mm RR Rede Ee Eee qw RE ES 206 8 13 1 Alarm Details Web Page 207 8 14 Screenshots Web Page ceros 207 015 AmwvescreecniWeb Pacel eaaa a R 208 8 16 Live Spectrum Web Page 4 oe coo coe c niaaa adaa 209 8 17 Software Update Web Page uiid otv rr 215 8 18 Password Web Page nananana aaa ccm mcm muc poe x 215 6 19 System Miles Web Page sa sss samaa a E AA 216 9 Sending Data to a Remote Server 219 EA PSCC ee o3 3 x 330 ee 08 8 08 AAA 220 O identiFINDER R3
222. s available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Bluetooth SPP p 104 gt Bluetooth SPP Status identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 23 Bluetooth This screen Figure 152 p 142 shows if the Bluetooth SPP mode is enabled and whether the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently Discoverable M Bluetooth SPP Status 30 Mar 13 25 Bluetooth SPP Status Status Enabled Discoverable Discoverable Figure 152 Bluetooth SPP Settings and Commands Status Indicates whether Enable SPP see 6 23 2 p 142 is set to On Enabled or Off Disabled Discoverable Indicates if the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently discoverable or not discoverable via Bluetooth in SPP Mode View and change the Bluetooth SPP Mode settings Return to the superior menu 6 23 2 Bluetooth SPP Settings 4 This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Bluetooth SPP p 104 gt Bluetooth SPP Status p 141 Bluetooth SPP Settings El settings p 180 Bluetooth SPP Settings p 192 Bluetooth SPP Settings p 192 This screen Figure 153 p 143 allows you to configure the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Bluetooth Serial Port Protocol mode identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Referen
223. s optimized for single handed operation see Figure 6 p 27 The detector should point to the object to be surveyed while you watch the display and control the instrument by pressing the keys with thumb and middle finger E For best dose rate calculations the source must not be too close to the instrument Figure 239 p 242 Figure 6 Surveying an object with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 display consists of a color LCD screen and several LEDs Figure 7 p 28 The fundamental principle of operation is to choose one of the available options and then execute the associated command or function by pressing a key identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection Operating Key Operating Key 17 Mar 11 04 2 Dose Rate EH 5 0 055 sn 0 000 cps Neutrons Options BA ax nanoRaider Neutron Alarm LED Available only for variants equipped with a Gamma Alarm LED neutron detector Power Key Figure 7 Papercraft model of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with operating elements Display LEDs and keys BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 2 4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Display The FLIR identiFINDER R300 display Figure 7 p 28 is a color LCD screen divided into three prin ciple areas Figure 8 p 29 TOP Title and Status Bar This area contains a brief title of the currently perf
224. s usable for gamma spectroscopy and the detection of thermal Neutrons Chemical Element Element CLYC Cesium Lithium Yttrium Chloride CONOPS CONOPs ConOps A Concept of Operations is a document describing the characteristics of a system from the viewpoint of an individual user of that system CONOPS are widely used in the US military or government services Continental Time 724 Hour Clock Coordinated Universal Time UTC A time standard based on International Atomic Time Time zones are specified as positive or negative offsets from UTC Count A single detected event registered by a detection system Cs LiYCl Ce Cesium Lithium Yttrium Chloride Curie The curie is an older non SI unit of radioactivity 7 Becquerel 1 Ci 3 7 x 101 Bq 1 Bg 2 70 x 10 11 Ci CZT Cadmium Zinc Telluride Dead Time DT The dead time of a detection system is the time after each event during which the system is busy and hence is not able to record another event if it happens An everyday analogon is the time you have to wait after taking a photo with flash to recharge the flash for the next photo D Glossary Decay The process by which an unstable Nuclide parent loses energy by emitting lonizing Radiation and transforming to another nuclide daughter Decay of a single nuclide is spon taneous that is it neither needs external triggering nor is it predictable The average decay rate of a large number of nuclides how
225. scaled in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 settings A 7 SPP Commands and Updates Dose units Lines 12 and 13 DoseWarningThres and DoseAlarmThres use dose units The possible scaled rem units are rem mrem prem and nrem The possible scaled Sievert units are Sv 1 ui Uu J mSv uSv and nSv Dose rate units Lines 6 10 and 11 DoseRate DoseRateWarningThres and DoseRateAlarmThres use dose rate units The possible scaled rem per hour units are rem h nrem h urem h and nrem h The possible scaled Sieverts per hour units are Sv h mSv h nSv h and noh Operating Mode Line 9 OperatingMode indicates the current mode the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is operating in Pos sible values include DoseRate Finder Identify or Other Neutron Information Lines 14 15 26 27 and 29 NeutronRateWarningThres NeutronRateAlarmThres NeutronCountRateWarning Neu tronCountRateAlarm and SigmaNeutronAlarm are only available on instruments that con tain an He 3 tube Sigma Alarms Lines 28 and 29 Sigma alarms are currently available only on R300 products A 7 3 Get Spectra The GetSpectra information can be queried through the command specified below or is automat ically transmitted upon selection of send on the user interface of the device Listing A 8 GetSpectra Command Mes Merson M ECHO CE EIN 2 COMM OG MEMS Ce SOR Cini a t 3 lt Argument name Number value
226. sent are determined by the name attribute shown in the example with the CommandName placeholder value Update messages will contain the same CommandName as the command message they are in response to type The type attribute indicates the device class sending the message For the FLIR identiFINDER R300 this will be nanoRaider id The id attribute shown in the example with the SerialNumber placeholder will con tain the unique serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 sending the message LS The id attribute value may contain non numerical characters For example the serial number may contain a dash Line 3 An Update message may contain zero one or multiple Property elements as children to the root element Property elements will normally have have two or three attribute specifica tions in the form of attribute name attribute value pairs name Each Property element will have a name attribute shown in the example with the PropertyName placeholder value value Each Property element will also have a value attribute shown in the example with the PropertyValue placeholder value units Some Property elements will also have a units attribute shown in the example with the PropertyUnits placeholder value Line 4 The ellipsis in this example are not part of the actual message and serve to indicate additional Argument elements may be allowed for an Update message Line 5 The root Update element is closed completing
227. shold Eg the Normal i Dose Rate T ttt Oo Lm 28 E 2 uSv h Figure 100 Dose rate display with alarm indication 5 1 Gamma Alarms The FLIR identiFINDER R300 continuously compares the detected gamma radiation against thresh olds you can specify for e dose warning and dose alarm see 6 33 p 161 e dose rate warning and dose rate alarm see 6 34 p 162 When a threshold is exceeded an appropriate warning or alarm is raised and reported visually Figure 101 p 99 and Figure 102 p 99 The appropriate behavior of the annunciators is detailed in Figure 105 p 100 5 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Alarms Warning Dose 8 258 uSv Mute Acknowledge Figure 101 Alarm display Dose rate warning funy Alarm Dose Rate 18 Mar 15 31 Ede Alarm Dose 8 659 uSv Dose Rate 10 27 mSv h Figure 102 Alarm display Dose rate alarm E 5 1 Gamma Alarms Figure 103 Gamma alarms as announced by the red LED beeper and vibrator EE identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 5 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Alarms 5 2 Neutron Alarms Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector The FLIR identiFINDER R300 continuously compares the number of detected neutrons per given period against thresholds you can specify for warnings and alarms see 6 35 p 163 When a threshold is exceeded an appropriate warning or alarm is raised and r
228. sic Activity The inner Activity of a radiation instrument without contribution from the environment or other sources lon A Nucleus whose number of Electrons differs from the number of Protons resulting in a net negative or positive electric charge lonizing Radiation Particle Radiation or Electromagnetic Radiation energetic enough to detach Electrons from atoms or molecules thus converting them to Ions D Glossary Ionization depends on the energy of radiation not on the number of particles or the wave length Roughly speaking particles or photons with energies above a few Electron Volts are ionizing Figure 243 Ionizing radiation warning symbol ISO 21482 Ionizing Radiation can cause serious damage when absorbed by living tissue and is therefore a health hazard IP Internet Protocol IP Address A unique numerical label that is assigned to devices participating in an Internet Protocol based computer network Usually itis a 32 bit number written in four 8 bit bytes for example 192 168 10 199 It is used to identify hosts or network interfaces and to address locations IrOBEX 7 OBject EXchange ISO International Organization for Standardization The world s largest developer and publisher of International Standards ISO is a network of the national standards institutes of countries around the world Isobar Different Nuclides having the same 7 Mass Number for example fgAr and 79K
229. sic radiation data and a small spectrum with logarithmic scaling are shown Figure 98 p 94 UU Automated Mode 28 Mar 16 10 Ee Measuring 0 052 uSv h Count Rate 28cps E Hio y Dead Time 0 0 66 So Progress Bar Switch Off Cancel Figure 98 Automated measurement 4 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes Settings and Commands Switch Off Switch off automated mode A Depending on your variant this might require entering the password 2 2 7 p 46 Cancel Cancel this measurement The next measurement will start as scheduled Detected Nuclides Once the Automated Mode measurement is complete the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will re port any nuclide s identified and indicate the reference number assigned to the stored results Initially the only available command on the nuclide results screen shows a countdown timer starting at 30s When the timer expires the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will return to the screen that was active before the Automated Mode measurement started Pressing prior to the timer expiring will cancel the timer and the command will change to EN Only appears if the results countdown timer was cancelled Press to close the results screen and return to the screen that was active before the Automated Mode measurement started Results Storage The results of the measurements are saved in the database of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 They are marked as being results of automated mea
230. sor Right key function 109 CZT 271 D Data web menu 180 Data Logging menu 104 Data Schemata web section 180 Data Types web section 180 Date 29 125 128 186 Date setting 127 Date Selection web section 180 Dead Time DT 271 Dead Time property 106 Decay 272 Delete key function 44 150 154 Deutsches Institut f r Normung DIN 272 Deviation property 116 Device Name setting 152 DHS 272 Dial Up Networking DUN 272 DIN 272 Dirty Bomb 272 Disconnect setting 143 Discoverable property 142 Disintegration 272 Display Settings command 104 122 Displayed Unit setting 159 DNDO 272 Dose 272 Dose key function 89 91 Dose Alarm Thresholds command 105 161 Dose Duration property 156 Dose Rate 272 INDEX Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds command 105 T62 Dose Rate Mode 86 Dose Rate Settings command 104 159 Down key function 36 38 82 118 122 125 127 128 137 143 145 148 150 153 155 159 164 225 Download Options web section 180 Download Settings command 104 154 DT 272 DU key function 116 DUN 272 Duration property 206 Duration setting 117 E Electromagnetic Radiation 272 Electron 272 Electron Volt eV 272 Element 273 Enable SPP property 142 Enable SPP setting 143 Energy key function 114 Equivalent Dose 273 Erase key function 133 134 Erase All Alarms command 10
231. ssage Figure 163 p 149 is displayed if pairing failed Make sure the Bluetooth device is correctly configured still in the vicinity and try again Your FLIR identiFINDER R300 is now ready to communicate via the Bluetooth device Make sure notto move the Bluetooth device more than about 10 m 33 ft away from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Choose and select menu items see 2 2 2 p 35 for details identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference O0 Bluetooth Periphery 23 Mar 17 11 EJ Information An error occurred while pairing with Jane s Mobile OK Figure 163 Pairing to a Bluetooth device failed oo0coco Edit values see 2 2 3 p 37 for details Return to the superior menu 6 24 Remote Server Settings e Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Remote Server Settings LOS Settings p 180 Connectivity p 190 Remote Server p 192 This screen Figure 164 p 149 groups settings that influence the transfer of FLIR identiFINDER R300 data to a remote server Refer to Chapter 9 p 219 for details of this method I Settings 22 Mar 13 33 Remote Server User Name John Doe Connection String CGDCONT 1 Phone Number 99 1 Figure 164 Upper items of the remote server settings identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 25 Mass Storage
232. st neutrons having an energy substantially above 1 eV slow Neutrons with an energy below 0 4 eV and thermal neutrons yielding an energy about 0 025 eV Fast neutrons are deccelerated or thermalized by a Moderator Nickel Metal Hydride NiMH The type of rechargeable batteries built into the FLIR powerPACK plus NID Nuclide Identification NiMH 7 Nickel Metal Hydride NORM 7 Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material Nuclear Fission Fission D Glossary Nuclear Fusion Fusion Nucleon Collective name for Neutrons and Protons two subatomic particles building an atomic Nucleus Nucleon Number Mass Number Nucleus The nucleus is a component of an 7 Atom carrying the majority of the net mass and an electric charge that is equal to the charge of all Electrons that orbit the nucleus A nucleus consists of Neutrons and 7 Protons which are therefore also called Nucleons Nuclide A nuclide is a Nucleus with a specified number of protons and neutrons that is having spe cific nuclear properties Nuclides are specified by the name of the chemical 7Element which implies the Atomic Number and the Mass Number for example 18Ar or 19K Where sub and superscripting are not possible or too challenging nuclides are often written as Ar 40 or K 40 OBEX 7 OBject EXchange OBject EXchange OBEX A communications protocol for the exchange of binary objects between devices It is main tained by the Infrared Data
233. surements see 8 11 p 199 45 Remote Controlled Spectrum Acquisition While the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is connected to a computer you can collect and analyze spectra via the web interface This method of data acquisition for spectra interrupts other operations of the instrument A Alarms will still be reported if necessary During the acquisition a message is shown Figure 99 p 96 You can stop it on the instrument with 31999 or via the web interface with see 8 16 p 209 After the acquisition the FLIR identiFINDER R300 resumes the mode it was in before If the previ ous operation was interrupted during a time limited task like collecting background or identifica tion data it must start over again 4 5 Remote Controlled Spectrum Acquisition FLIR Detection Web Spectrum 29 Mar 12 30 Web Spectrum The current acquisition of spectra via the web interface interrupts other operations You can however stop the acquisition Figure 99 Message during remote controlled spectrum acquisition O identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 5 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Alarms Chapter 5 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Alarms Ifthe FLIR identiFINDER R300 detects radiation above certain thresholds you can specify see 6 33 p 161 it raises an alarm Alarms can be reported via several annunciators Main Display Details of the alarm are always displayed on screen no matter which other activity was dis
234. tails BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 FLIR Detection 6 FLIR identiFINDE NE VE Information Please set the operator name and the callback number Continue Cancel Figure 147 Sending Data Incomplete settings 110 Sending data 24 Mar 12 09 M 0 Sending data Preparing Succeeded Activating Bluetooth Succeeded Connecting Started Sending Done Figure 148 Sending Data Transmission progress Return to the superior menu identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 ee 6 22 Send Spectrum 110 Sending data 24 Mar 12 40 Sending data Preparing S Activating Bluetooth Succ Connecting Sending Succeeded Done OK Figure 149 Sending Data Mission accomplished 622 Send Spectrum This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth see A 1 p 237 gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Send Data p 104 gt Send opectrum This command initiates a multi step procedure to send a spectrum stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s database to a remote server see 9 p 219 E The procedure is the same as that for sending identification results The description of the procedure is not repeated here please refer to section 6 21 p 137 The only difference is in the contents of the file sent You can choose from the results avail
235. tatus Battery Status Model nanoRaider ZH Serial Number 103156000000 Software Version 2014 3 Available Memory 94 Spectroscopic Detector One CdZnTe 15x13x5 Web Page Dose Rate Detector Two additional CdZnTe 15x13x5 Sections He tube 3He3 608 15NS Service Europe Africa Middle FLIR Detection Inc 100 Midland Road Oak Ridge TN 37830 USA T 1 865 220 8700 F 1 865 220 7187 radiation support flir com detectionsupport com radiation Software FLIR Detection Inc Luxemburgstraat 2 2321 Meer Belgium T 32 0 3665 5106 F 32 0 3303 5624 radiation support flir com detectionsupport com radiation Service Asia Pacific FLIR Detection Inc 3 Pickering Street 03 49 Nankin Row Singapore 048660 T 65 6822 1596 radiation support flir com detectionsupport com radiation Version 2014 3 FLIR Radiation Figure 42 Anatomy of a FLIR identiFINDER R300 web page wide layout Serial Number 103156000000 manoRalder Resources e System Settings Model Data Serial Number Live Screen Software Version Live Spectrum Available Memory Administration Spectroscopic Detector Dose Rate Detector Two additional CdZnTe 15x13x5 Neutron Detector He tube 3He3 608 15NS FLIR Detection Inc 100 Midland Road Oa
236. tes A 7 1 Ping The Ping command will generate a Ping update from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 This can be used to verify SPP communication is functional and to determine the device serial number Listing A 4 Ping Command MS cogil cTcmon M ENIRO EIE te 7 2 Command name Ping gt 0 The Ping command should be verbatim as shown in the listing Listing A 5 Ping Update 1 AA O A 7 2 lt Update name Ping type nanoRaider id SerialNumber gt 10 Test footnote A 7 SPP Commands and Updates Line 1 XML Declaration The XML declaration is the same for all messages Line 2 Update element The message will will contain one Update element as the root element nn A Ping update will always report Ping asthe name attribute type The type attribute indicates the device class sending the message For the FLIR identiFINDER R300 this will be nanoRaider The root Update element is closed completing the XML portion of the message The message is then terminated with the NUL character at the end of line 2 This is not part of the XML specification but is required by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a message delim iter A 7 2 Status A Status update message can be queried through the command specified below or is periodically transmitted during the presence of a radiation or low battery alarm Listing A 6 Status Command Mo coslada ECC NE ma e 2 omnia UI JW Listing A 7 Example Status
237. the form of seleno methionine this nuclide is used to investigate enzyme production in the digestive tract O Industrially used material Used as a radiotracer for biological and industrial research O Industrially used material Used to study the sodium potassium exchange dynamic of nerve ax ons within the nervous systems of living organisms Also used to lo cate leaks in industrial pipe lines and in oil well studies C Medically used material Used for imaging the heart muscle lungs brain and the skeletal sys tem Other uses include imaging the kidney liver thyroid spleen gall bladder salivary and lacrimal glands and the heart blood pool It is also used to investigate other medical issues like certain types of in fections Also used for tracing sewage and liquid waste movements within city infrastructures This nuclide is a fission product in nu clear reactors It can occur in the radioactive fall out resulting from hazardous incidents in nuclear power plants Medically used material Used for diagnosing coronary artery disease and other heart prob lems Thorium 232Th Th 232 U 232 14 05 Ga Uranium U 68 9 a U 232 Th 232 253U 160 ka U 233 252U 704 Ma U 235 U 4 468 Ga U 238 MEU 704 Ma 4 468 Ga Uranium Xenon 133X Xe 133 5d6h C Nuclide Library 232m or 232U O Naturally occurring radioactive material Found naturally occurring in abundance within the earth crust it is
238. tiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings i Data i Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration z Live Spectrum Spectrum Acquisition Status Counts 13 Energy Range 327 330 keV Gross counts 4853 Scaling Logarithm Linear 5quare Root Saved Data Spectrum Data Acquisition Data GP5 Coordinates 51 12 39 N 7 4 3E Gamma Count Rate 130 cps Available only for variante detector 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 219 Live spectrum page during data acquisition identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 O 8 16 Live Spectrum Web Page Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings i Data i Live Screen gt Live 5pectrum gt Administration Live Spectrum Spectrum Nuclide Information Counts 13 Energy Range 327 330 keV Gross counts 4853 Saved Data Spectrum Data eme O a Acquisition Data Date Time Fri 2010 10 08 15 31 GP5 Coordinates 51 12 39 N 7 4 E Gamma Count Rate 130 cps Available only for variante detector 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 220 Identification results of a live spectrum identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server 8 17 Software Update Web Page E Administration p 181 gt Softwa
239. tings key function 142 Settings web menu 180 Severity setting 118 Show Status command 104 130 Shut Down key function 65 Shutting Down 64 INDEX SI Syst me International d Unit s 285 SI Prefixes 285 Sievert Sv 285 SIM 285 Skip key function 35 39 41 43 45 47 77 81 92 107 118 119 121 Sodium Iodide Nal 285 Software property 131 Software Update web page 181 SOP 285 Source Stabilization 286 Spc 286 spc file type 154 202 204 spe file type 154 202 204 Specific Activity 286 Spectra web page 180 Spectrum 286 Spectrum command 103 106 Spectrum key function 77 93 Spectrum Acquisition 232 Square Root key function 114 Standard Operating Procedure SOP 286 Standing Operating Procedure 286 Start key function 92 107 134 151 Start Search key function 82 145 Start Time property 202 Starting Up 62 Status property 142 Stop key function 95 107 108 157 211 Sv 286 Switch Off key function 95 Switching Off 64 Switching On 62 System key function 130 System property 130 System web section 179 System Files web page 181 INDEX Systeme International d Unit s 286 T Technologically Enhanced Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material TENORM 286 TENORM 286 Tethering 286 Th 232 key function 116 Thermal Neutron 287 Time 29 125 128 186 Time setting 127
240. tings p 116 BEEN identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 103156003542 nanoHalder Home z Settings Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration General Measurement Unit for Dose Display Is the Finder mode available Integration Time for the Finder Mode Sensitivity for the Finder Automated Mode Time Interval Identification Measurement Duration Static 30 5 5 Extra Measurement Duration 30 Confidence Severity Usage User Interface um Backlight Intensity 10 Bright Language Key Functions Normal i Swapped 2014 2 FLIR Radiation Figure 202 General Settings web page identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 1 GPS and Clock Web Page 8 3 3 User Interface LS Settings p 180 General p 184 gt User Interface This web page section Figure 202 p 185 lets you inspect or edit settings regarding the screen and keyboard of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 You can access these settings on the instrument as well Please find the details about the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt General Options p 104 gt Display Settings p 122 8 4 GPS and Clock Web Page settings p 180 GPS and Clock This settings web page lets you inspect and specify GPS
241. tion dysfunction Also used in PET scans for studying the brain and the heart functions Medically used material Used in a medical procedure for detecting hormone levels in the blood Used for cancer treatment of the brain and prostate It is also used to diagnose deep vein blood clots in the leg and certain kinds of kidney maladies Medically used material Used for therapy such as imaging the thyroid and treating its related cancers Also used to diagnose abnormal liver function kidney blood flow and urinary tract obstruction This nuclide is a fission product in nuclear reactors It can occur in the radioactive fall out resulting from hazardous incidents in nuclear power plants Iridium 192 77lr Ir 197 Manganese 54 25Mn Mn 54 Molybdenum 42Mo Mo 99 Neptunium 232Np Np 237 Plutonium Plutonium Potassium 40 19K K 40 Radium 226 gg Ra Ra 226 74d 312d 2d18h 2 14Ma 6561 a 24100a 1 277 Ga 1600a C Nuclide Library C Industrially used material Temporarily implanted in wire form for use as an internal radiother apy source in cancer treatment Also used to test the integrity of pipeline welds boilers and aircraft parts O Industrially used material Used to study and predict the behavior of heavy metal pollutants within the outflow of waste water from mining operations O Industrially used material Used for generating Tc 1 Special nuclear material No major com
242. tions and settings menus of the instrument Figure 35 p 47 If your variant comes with a factory set password it is LMRLMRL 2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Pd j OO Authentication 18 Mar 16 08 EL Password Entry Figure 35 Entering a password to access the option menus 4z For better protection against unwanted changes of the instrument characteristics you should change the password to something else 6 12 p 128 If you don t need protection but want faster access to the menus you can remove the password 6 13 p 129 Settings and Commands Cycle the list of commands see 2 2 1 p 35 Enter the password by seven presses in the correct sequence D To cancel the password entry press O for a moment After the seventh entry the key labels change Figure 36 p 48 Confirm your password entry and have the instrument check your entry for correctness L After you entered the correct password you don t have to enter it again until you switch off the instrument If you enter a wrong password you will be informed Figure 37 p 48 After you confirm the message with QS the instrument will return to the mode it was in before asking for the password Cancel Cancel the password entry and return without proceeding to the protected options and com mands identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 2 2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys FLIR Detection IJI Authenticatio
243. tor for fast Neutrons Also known as Acrylic Glass Polymethylene 7 Polyethylene Polythene 7 Polyethylene Positron A subatomic particle with a positive electric charge counterpart of the 7Electron It is emit ted as Beta Radiation Potassium Chloride KCI A salt containing natural K used to calibrate radiation detection systems Proton A subatomic particle with a positive electric charge It builds the Nucleus of each atom along with Neutrons A proton is also stable by itself and has a second identity as the hydrogen Jon H D Glossary Proton Number A Atomic Number Pulse Height Analyzer PHA An instrument which accepts electronic pulses of varying heights from particle and event de tectors digitizes the pulses heights and saves them in channels for spectral analysis Radiation The propagation of energetic particles Particle Radiation or electromagnetic waves Electromagnetic Radiation through a medium or space Examples are Alpha Radia tion Beta Radiation Gamma Radiation Neutrons but also X rays radio waves light microwaves or heat The word Radiation commonly is used as an abbreviation for Ionizing Radiation Neutrons Metal Foil Figure 245 Shielding of ionizing radiation not to scale Radio Time 724 Hour Clock Radioactive Decay 7 Decay Radiological Dispersal Device 7 Radiological Dispersion Device Radiological Dispersion Device RDD A weap
244. trary reference number of the record Saved on The date and time of storage of the record Type The trigger of the identification measurement You saved the measurement manually see 4 3 p 90 Auto The measurement was triggered by the automated mode see 4 4 p 93 identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 8 11 Identifications Web Page Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Data Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Identifications omo Saved on 2010 08 25 10 51 Manual 2010 08 25 10 04 Manual ed 2010 08 25 10 02 2010 08 25 09 51 1 2010 08 25 09 45 Manual 2010 02 25 09 36 2010 08 25 09 21 Available only for variants equipped with Wed 2010 08 25 07 49 Manual a neutron detector 2010 08 25 07 48 2010 08 25 07 26 Manual EE 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 210 Table of identification result records Neutron Alarm Shows whether a neutron alarm was raised during the measurement this identification result is based upon 4 Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector Open a page showing details see 8 11 1 p 200 of the record 8 11 1 Identification Details Web Page Details of a single record are shown on an individual page Figure 211 p 201 which you can open from the table of records Figure 210 p 200 by clicking Show For the navigation of records and other common elements of re
245. tted along a perpendicular axis Digital spectra are discrete that is they collect the plotted quantity into separate channels representing a small range of the characteristic quantity Standard Operating Procedure SOP A set of instructions for a procedure to be executed always in exactly the same manner Also known as Standing Operating Procedure Standing Operating Procedure Standard Operating Procedure Sv Sievert Systeme International d Unit s ASI Technologically Enhanced Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material TENORM Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material as used in for example oil and gas exploration development and production operations TENORM Technologically Enhanced Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material Tethering Using a mobile device such as a mobile phone to supply Internet access for another device which is otherwise unconnected using the mobile device as a modem This can be done through for example Bluetooth wireless technology or cables such as 7USB D Glossary Thermal Neutron Neutron Temperature Total Time Real Time Trickle Charging Charging a battery to balance its intrinsic self discharge thus maintaining the full capacity of the battery True Time Real Time Uniform Resource Identifier URI A string of characters used to identify a name or a resource on the Internet Unit Prefixes Prefixes for SI units Table 4 p 287 Table 4 Prefixes
246. ttime Colors optimized for dazzle free reading in dark environments Figure 129 p 123 21 Mar 14 56 Display Colors Backlight Timeout Language English Figure 129 Display settings in nighttime colors Classic Colors mimicking the monochrome appearance of outdated instruments Figure 130 p 124 6 9 Display Settings Figure 130 Display settings in classic colors Backlight Specify the brightness ofthe display s backlight in steps between 1 dim and 10 very bright Specify the duration of user inactivity after which the display backlight is dimmed to save energy You can choose from 15 s 60s 5 min Never X The backlight draws a significant amount of power you should let it time out while run ning on batteries After the backlight times out you can reactivate it by briefly pressing any key At this moment the usual functions of short key presses are ignored Choose a language to be used for the display English English with American spelling Deutsch German more languages A Ensure you understand enough of the language you are changing to It may be difficult to change back if you do not understand the menu language Choose a mapping of commands to keys to accommodate your personal preferences Fig ures 10 11 p 33 34 Em The actual function of the keys is always displayed on screen identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER
247. u get notified in the notification area Figure 192 p 175 J Found New Hardware Your new hardware is installed and ready to use Figure 192 End of the installation 6 You are now ready to use the web interface of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 see 8 p 179 You will have to repeat these steps for every FLIR identiFINDER R300 you connect to your computer sometimes even if you connect the same instrument to a different USB port of your computer gt To remove the driver software 1 Open the Windows System Control Panel 2 Open Add Remove Software 3 Selectthe FLIR RNDIS Driver from the list by clicking its entry 4 Click and follow the instructions given on screen 1 3 3 Windows Vista Windows 7 You must install the driver software included within the FLIR identiFINDER R300 before you can use the USB network connection of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Microsoft Windows Vista and Windows 7 behave virtually identical regarding this installa tion The following screenshots are taken from Windows 7 A This installation requires you to have administrator privileges for your computer Ask your IT administrator if in doubt The driver installer is included with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 you can access it via the USB mass storage mode 7 2 p 170 To install the driver software 1 Start the mass storage connection from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer see 7 2 p 170 2 Open the
248. ucts This will increase the run time and also the charging duration 11 3 Battery Power Saving Tips In order to prolong the runtime of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 s batteries you can avoid certain operations or optimize some settings for reduced power consumption 11 3 Battery Power Saving Tips This section lists those features of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 that need alot of energy but might not be necessary all the time or for all fields of application The list begins with the more energy demanding features and proceeds to the frugal ones Backlight Brightness and Timeout The backlight of the screen draws a significant amount of power Reduce the backlight bright ness see 6 9 p 122 to what you really need in your environment Let the backlight time out after the shortest period of inactivity see 6 9 p 122 convenient for your workflow A status icon on the screen keeps you posted about the current energy saving options see 2 1 p 30 GPS Receiver Switch off the GPS receiver see 6 11 p 127 if you don t need coordinates to be saved with for example identification results or spectra Switch off the GPS receiver while you work at places with poor or no GPS reception inside buildings in mines etc Communication via Bluetooth Send data to remote servers see 9 p 219 only when necessary X The Bluetooth hardware draws power only while you communicate with remote servers You don t have to expli
249. uetooth Periphery and select it gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Advanced Options p 104 gt Connectivity Options p 104 gt Bluetooth Periphery Note If the SPP Enabled screen appears then you must first disable Bluetooth SPP mode at gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Bluetooth SPP p 104 gt Bluetooth SPP Status p 141 Bluetooth SPP oettings Once Bluetooth SPP is disabled if necessary return to Bluetooth Periphery using the first part of this step before continuing 10 1 Pairing the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Satellite Phone 5 Ifthe FLIR identiFINDER R300 has not yet been paired with any Bluetooth device it will be gin the search immediately so continue to the next step If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 has previously been paired with another device then the Bluetooth device selection screen will appear Figure 226 p 224 Select AAA then select ERE from the next screen Figure 227 p 224 to initiate a search for discoverable Bluetooth devices O0 Bluetooth Periphery 23 Mar 17 26 Jane s Mobile Change device Figure 226 Select Change Device if an unwanted device is paired __ Bluetooth Periphery 17Sep 12 14 Search Prepare your Bluetooth devices to be found and press Start search to start a search sweep for them Figure 227 Prepare your Bluetooth devices appears after selecting Change device 6 Wait a few moments whi
250. uipped with a neutron detector the current neutron rate is shown below the gamma dose rate If the dose rate rises above the overload threshold see A 1 p 237 the instrument s results are unreliable This condition is displayed on the screen Figure 88 p 87 We strongly recommend that you retreat from environments with radiation that high Overload 18 Mar 10 13 M0 Danger Leave the high dose area and press Confirm Figure 88 Detector overload Move the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a location with lower radiation and then press CU 4 2 Finder Mode Settings and Commands Switch to Finder mode see 4 2 p 88 Inspect and change options see 6 p 103 42 Finder Mode You can use the FLIR identiFINDER R300 in Finder Mode to locate a radiation source Move the instrument around the vicinity of a suspected source and monitor the display the red LED vibrator and beeper of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 for changes The vibration and especially the sound get more excited the closer the instrument is to the source X Finder mode can be disabled see 6 30 p 157 9 You can switch off the LED the vibrator and the beeper see 6 32 p 160 Immediately after switching to the Finder mode the FLIR identiFINDER R300 begins a background measurement Figure 89 p 89 6 For better results move the FLIR identiFINDER R300 away from suspected radiation sources during the background measurement
251. um Full Width at Half Maximum FWHM The full width at half maximum height of a Peak in a Spectrum Figure 242 p 274 D Glossary Fusion X4 X2 x Figure 242 Full width at half maximum height of a peak An exothermic nuclear process in which two or more light Nuclei are confined together forming a heavier nucleus The magnetic confinement is usually realized in plasma devices as e g a Tokamak or a Stellarator A Tokamak is a toroidal chamber surrounded by magnetic coils It can be seen as a huge current transformator which produces enough potential to ignite a plasma inside the chamber Contrary to the symmetric appearance of a Tokamak a Stellarator has a non symmetric highly complex field and chamber design Also known as Nuclear Fusion FWHM y Radi Full Width at Half Maximum ation Gamma Radiation Gamma Radiation Gamma y radiation is energetic typically gt 100 keV Electromagnetic Radiation of high 01 frequency typically 10 Hz and very short wavelength typically 10 m Gamma radiation originating from 7 Decay typically carries energies from a few hundred keV to about 10 MeV and is 7Ionizing Radiation Gamma radiation penetrates deeply and is difficult to stop It can be stopped by a sufficiently thick layer of material with high Atomic Number such as g Pb lead Figure 245 p 283 Also known as y Radiation Gamma Ray Detection Ge Gamma rays can be d
252. und the chart Settings and Commands Cycle the list of commands see 2 2 1 p 35 lt r P h X9 Press to exit to the superior screen 5 5 Start or stop the acquisition of data for the spectrum The current status is shown in the cen ter of the chart Figure 110 p 107 which updates live with the acquired data M Spectrum 21 Mar 09 40 s072keV 7 Acquisition Status n Real Live Time Indicator Acquisition Duration 5 y RT 181 85 Gc 16658 0 060 uSv h DI 0 696 Figure 110 Acquiring spectrum data A You cannot startthe acquisition ifthe duration you preset see 6 8 p 121 for acquisition has ended This is indicated by a remaining acquisition duration Figure 111 p 108 of 0 If you try to start nevertheless your FLIR identiFINDER R300 beeps identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 2 Spectrum x The current spectrum is not cleared before recording data that is new measurements are added to the existing spectrum To record a pristine spectrum use the com mand first see below The acquisition of spectrum data stops in one ofthe following events e You end the acquisition with EN e The end of the real or life duration you specified see 6 8 p 121 is reached You know the duration is preset because of the indicator Figure 111 p 108 and the timer is counting down 21 Mar 10 06 WM SEN 3072 kev 5 l Acquisition Status qi m Real Live T
253. ure 167 p 152 groups settings related to the connections between your FLIR identiFINDER R300 and a computer Network Device Name nanoRaider USB Subnet 172 network Down Figure 167 Network settings A It is recommended to restart your FLIR identiFINDER R300 after changing network settings If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently connected to an external device you have to reestablish the connection according to the new settings Settings and Commands Device Name The name of this FLIR identiFINDER R300 to identify itin communication with other devices Em Spaces are not allowed in this text MEE identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 mE 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference USB Subnet To connect to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 via IP it must have an IP address This address is taken from one of the pools of IP addresses reserved by the IANA for private networks You can choose from the listed pools Try to avoid subnets already in use in your local area network Ask your network ad ministrator when in doubt which pool best suits your network environment 172 Network 1 048 576 addresses from 172 16 0 0 to 172 31 255 255 10 Network 16 777 216 addresses from 10 0 0 0 to 10 255 255 255 192 168 Network 65 536 addresses from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 255 x You can choose the subnet but not the IP address The address is fixed and remains always the same for a given instrument
254. ut the settings in chapter FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference under gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Identification Options p 103 gt Nuclide Visibility p 118 gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Identification Options p 103 gt Nuclide Usage p 119 gt Options Menu p 103 gt More Options p 103 gt Identification Options p 103 gt Nuclide Severity p 120 A The severity of some nuclides is fixed In these cases the menu to set the severity is inactive To transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 click Save 8 9 Backup Web Page E settings p 180 gt Backup This web page Figure 208 p 195 lets you backup and restore the complete settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server Serial Number 103156000000 nanoHalder Info Settings Data i Live Screen gt Live Spectrum gt Administration Backup hd X Tip To have several instruments use identical settings download the settings file from one instrument and upload it to the other instruments Backup Download the settings file from this device Restore Upload a settings file to this device Upload Reset Factory Settings 2013 1 FLIR Radiation Figure 208 Backup web page The instruments settings are saved in an xml file You can inspect or edit this file with common text editors supporting U
255. when you actually want to send data EE identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 10 Connecting via Satellite Phone Chapter 10 Connecting via Satellite Phone The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can also transmit data using a Bluetooth DUN connection with a satellite phone In order to utilize this method of transport the FLIR identiFINDER R300 must be paired to a Bluetooth to Serial converter that is connected to the satellite phone and configured to properly connect to the phone and a reachback server 10 1 Pairing the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Satellite Phone Currently the Iridium 95054 satellite phone with Iridium data adapter and Parani SD1000 Bluetooth to Serial adapter have been verified with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 but other satellite phones and adapters may also work Contact our service department for more information gt To pair with the satellite phone 1 Connect the Parani SD1000 Bluetooth to Serial adapter connected to the Iridium 9505A satellite phone 2 Usinga pin press and hold the adapter s recessed Pairing button for two seconds then release While the LED is flashing in a triple flash pattern the adapter is discoverable 3 Place the device in the vicinity of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 The maximum range is 10m 33 ft but could be less depending on the environment 4 From Dose Rate mode on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 press the right button to access the Options menu then navigate to Bl
256. xceed one of the thresholds the instrument raises an alarm which is reported on screen Figure 66 p 72 and optionally by LEDs beeper and vibrator see 5 p 97 for details about the beep and vibration patterns You can press Q to silence alarm annunciation by beeper and vibrator Press Q UTON after you took notice of the alarm or warning The alarm or warning will be reported in the title bar until the radiation drops below the appropriate threshold Figure 66 p 72 3 22 Neutron Radiation Survey 4 Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector gt To survey for neutrons 1 Hold the FLIR identiFINDER R300 close to your body so that the neutron detector Figure 238 p 241 is close to you Figure 67 p 73 3 2 Observing the Environment Figure 65 Surveying an object with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 24 Mar 17 28 E1 E Warning Dose Rate Warning Dose 11 42 uSv Dose Rate 155 uSv h Neutrons 0 000 cps Acknowledge Figure 66 Dose rate warning reported on screen 2 Turn around 360 to detect the neutrons regardless of your location relative to the source 3 Field Operating Guide Figure 67 Optimum posture for neutron detection AN For tests involving un moderated neutron sources a 30 cm x 30 cm x 15 cm PMMA phantom Figure 240 p 243 or equivalent must be placed between the source and the detector in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Figure 238 p 241 in ord
257. xes Sievert Sv The SI derived unit of dose equivalent It attempts to reflect the biological effects of lonizing Radiation as opposed to the physical aspects which are characterized by the 7 Absorbed Dose Gray 2 1Sv 1 1 gt m kg s For Gamma Radiation these are the same base units as the Gray To avoid confusion do not use J kg but always Gy for the absorbed dose and Sv for the dose equivalent SIM Subscriber Identity Module used for example in mobile phones Sodium lodide Nal Substance to build Scintillation Counters SOP Standard Operating Procedure D Glossary Source Stabilization Method to continuously adjust for the drift of a detection system by measuring the radiation of a known reference source Spc A file format used by former measuring instruments to store spectrum data Was replaced by the more versatile and standardized ANSI N42 42 format Specific Activity The Activity in Becquerel per amount of substance The amount is usually given as mass for solid matter Bq kg specific activity sensu stricto or as volume for liquids Bq l activ ity concentration Also known as Activity Concentration Spectrum The continuous arrangement of the components of Radiation in a progressive series ac cording to a characteristic quantity such as wavelength frequency energy charge mass etc Using this arrangement as one axis another quantity e g intensity can be plo
258. xternal power for running the FLIR identiFINDER R300 or charging the batteries Refer to chapter 11 p 229 for details Data Communication The FLIR identiFINDER R300 supports several methods of data communication via USB which are explained in this and the following chapter Mass Storage Device The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can behave as a mass storage device to transfer data to the computer A This mode is exclusive that is no other data communication is possible while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 behaves as a mass storage device Web Server The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can act as a web server you can access in a web browser to download data or to operate the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and change its settings with the enhanced convenience of a large screen and a real keyboard The remainder of this chapter explains e How to set up the physical connection 7 1 p 168 e How to use the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a mass storage device 7 2 p 170 e Howto prepare the computer 7 3 p 171 for accessing the web interface detailed in chapter 8 p 179 7 1 Plugging and Unplugging 1 1 Plugging and Unplugging The FLIR identiFINDER R300 draws a current of approximately 400 mA Before connecting to a computer please make sure the USB outlet of the computer complies with this requirement This might not be the case with some laptops netbooks or similar battery powered devices Figure 179 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER
259. y is stopped 110 Identification 18 Mar 11 34 M0 OU rce Schematic Count Rate Current Dose Rate 4 294 LSV h O 2 DI E Sigue i to ruration 18 s of 505 414 cps Current Count Rate Best Range Keep distance to source ice Figure 91 Identification Mode Progress display during time limited data acquisition The FLIR identiFINDER R300 achieves better identification results if the count rate is within a cer tain range shown in the center of in the indicator While the current count rate is outside the desired range advices are shown so you can shorten Figure 92 p 91 or lengthen Figure 93 p 91 the distance between the instrument and the radiation source Ifthe acquisition is limited not by the time but the number of counts 6 4 p 116 the display looks slightly different Figure 94 p 92 Az You should try to move the instrument into a good position although the advice on moving the instrument in a position for best identification is not shown in this mode to make room for the number of counts relative to the required minimum 4 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes 110 identification 18 Mar 12 10N 0 e Best Range Point unit itto source Current Count Rate 0 761 uSv h 0 0 DT s of 50s 16cps Move closer to source if possible Advice Figure 92 Identification Mode Count rate too low for best results WO identification 116 8 uSv h 2 3 DT 3 s of
260. your FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently paired with if any and lets you search the vicinity for other suitable Bluetooth devices supporting dial up networking 9 p 219 O0 Bluetooth Periphery 23 Mar 17 26 Name of the Currently Paired Bluetooth Device Jane s Mobile Change device Figure 154 Bluetooth Periphery Em If SPP Enabled is displayed then you must first disable the Bluetooth SPP Mode 6 23 2 p 142 before using Bluetooth Periphery Mode 23 Mar 16 09 O0 Bluetooth Periphery SPP Enabled Cannot search for Bluetooth devices while SPP Mode is enabled Cancel Figure 155 SPP Enabled Em If your FLIR identiFINDER R300 is not currently paired with any Bluetooth device the command see below is executed first Change Device identiFINDER R300 en 2014 4 13623 Feb2015 6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference Settings and Commands Bluetooth Device Name The name of the device the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently paired with Selecting this item shows details about this device Figure 162 p 148 Change Device Guides you through the steps necessary to pair your FLIR identiFINDER R300 with a Blue tooth device gt To pair with a Bluetooth device 1 Prepare the Bluetooth device and make sure it can be found perhaps called discover able or visible in the device s settings 2 Place the device in the vicinity of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 up to ca 10 m 33 ft

identiFINDER®R300, User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

identiFINDER&reg;R300, User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

identiFINDER®R300, User Manual